Nokia Solutions and Networks T6AP1 SC4812ETL 1.9GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Covers
Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ETL 1.9GHz CDMA BTS Covers
Users Manual
t !"!
""
Release 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.x
68P09250A99–1
English
08/15/2000
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any
inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been
carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,
Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make
changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean
that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted
Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and
other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,
reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola
material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,
distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of
Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may
be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or
documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,
manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe
controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks
and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiled
herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright
Copyright 2000 Motorola, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Printed on
Recyclable Paper
REV010600
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
08/15/2000 i
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table of Contents
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Release 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.x
List of Figures iv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables vi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Information xi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword xii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Safety xv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History xvii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patent Notification xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1: Introduction
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Optimize 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment and Software 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Documents and Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Equipment Identification 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Identification 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Assembly Location and Identification 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Sector Configurations 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations
Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Power Up 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the LMF 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF to BTS Connection 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using CDMA LMF 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the Processors 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
ii
Download the BTS 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Set Calibration 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms Testing 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX FER Acceptance Test 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5: Leaving the Site
Updating Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepare to Leave the Site 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Basic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS – Fault Isolation 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents – continued
08/15/2000 iii
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations C-1. . . . . . . . .
Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American PCS Bands .
D-1
Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Test Equipment Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Cable Calibration F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix G: Download ROM Code
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
iv
List of Figures
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Release 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.x
Figure 1-1: Typical Logical BTS Configurations 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-2: SC4812ETL Cabinet 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs
(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity) 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-5: RF Interface Panel 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-6: RFDS and DRDC Details 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1-7: SC4812ETL LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-24. . . . . . . .
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-2: AC Load Center External Power Connections 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-3: Cabinet Power Subassemblies 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-5: DC Power Distribution Assembly 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-6: Meter Alarm Panel 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-7: Temperature Compensation Panel 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2-8: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-3: CDMA LMF Folder Structure 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-4: BTS Folder Name Syntax Example 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-5: CAL File Name Syntax Example 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-6: CDF Name Syntax Example 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-7: Code Load File Name Syntax Example 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-8: DDS File Name Syntax Example 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-9: LMF Connection Detail 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-10: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-27. . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-11: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-12: CSM MMI Terminal Connection 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-13: Cable Calibration Test Setup 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Figures – continued
08/15/2000 v
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935) 3-51. . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest 3-52. . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-16: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935
and Advantest) 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-20: Battery Overtemperature Sensor 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3-21: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel 3-92. . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor
Display Examples 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6-3: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6-4: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D-1. . .
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum
(CDMA Allocation). D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB
without Rubidium Reference F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB
with Rubidium Reference F-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz
Rubidium Reference F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz
Rubidium Reference F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-5: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface F-13. . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-6: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 F-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-7: Power Meter Detail F-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure F-8: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail F-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
vi
List of Tables
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Release 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.x
Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-2: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-15. .
Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers
(Bottom Shelf) 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1-5: Sector Configurations 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-4: Pre–power DC Power Distribution System Test 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-5: Applying AC Power 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-6: Cabinet DC Power–Up Tests 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch Block 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-3: CD ROM Installation 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-5: Create HyperTerminal Connection 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-33. . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued
08/15/2000 vii
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-39. . . . . . . . .
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-21: Test Equipment Setup 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-22: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-56. .
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-24: Test Equipment Calibration 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-25: Cable Calibration 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-26: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-28: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-29: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-30: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-31: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-32: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-33: BTS TX Path Calibration 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-34: Download BLO 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-35: TX Path Audit 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-36: All Cal/Audit Test 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-37: Create CAL File 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-38: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-39: Definition of Parameters 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-40: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-41: Set Antenna Map Data 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-42: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-43: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-45: Program NAM Procedure 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-46: Heat Exchanger Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-47: Door Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-49: Minor Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-50: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
viii
Table 3-51: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-54: Battery Over Temperature Alarm 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-55: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-56: Check Before Leaving the Site 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests 4-3. . . . . . . .
Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-9: Test FER 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-10: Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-6: Remove LMF 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-7: Connect T1 Span/Modem Cable 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-2. . . . . . . .
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer
Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-7: LPA Errors 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset
Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor
Measurement Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued
08/15/2000 ix
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s) 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s) 6-16. .
Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2 6-16. . . . .
Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2s 6-17. . . . .
Table 6-20: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-17. . . . . . .
Table 6-21: No MCC24 Channel Elements 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-25: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation – All RX and TX paths fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path 6-21. . . . .
Table 6-28: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6-29: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-2: Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier
Non–adjacent Channels) A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier
Adjacent Channels) A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B-3: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix B-4. . . . . . . . . . .
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) C-1. . . . . . . . .
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn E-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
x
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without
Rubidium Reference F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With
Rubidium Reference F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-3: System Connectivity F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-10. . . . . . .
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using
Advantest R3465 F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure F-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Information
08/15/2000 xi
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Model & Options Charts
Refer to the SC 4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Units manual (68P TBS)
for detailed model structure and option information
This document covers only the steps required to verify the functionality
of the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) equipment prior to system
level testing, and is intended to supplement site specific application
instructions. It also should be used in conjunction with existing product
manuals. Additional steps may be required.
Foreword
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
xii
Scope of manual
This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system
craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system
equipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of this
information has a general understanding of telephony, as used in the
operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and is
familiar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellular
mobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is not
expected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internal
operation of the equipment.
This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment
training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or
enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
Text conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out
information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the
surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.
The four categories of these special paragraphs are:
Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that
you can use.
NOTE
Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable
situation or provides additional information to help you
understand a topic or concept.
IMPORTANT
*
Presents information to identify a situation in which
equipment damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to
equipment.
CAUTION
Presents information to warn you of a potentially
hazardous situation in which there is a possibility of
personal injury.
WARNING
Foreword – continued
08/15/2000 xiii
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
The following special paragraphs are used in tables in the manual to
point out information that must be read.
NOTE
Presents additional, helpful non-critical information that you can use.
* IMPORTANT
Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable situation or
provide additional information to help you understand a topic or
concept.
! CAUTION
Presents information to identify a situation where equipment damage
could occur and help you avoid damaging your equipment.
n WARNING
Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous situation
where there is a possibility of personal injury (serious or otherwise).
Changes to manual
Changes that occur after the printing date are incorporated into your
manual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in this
manual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options and
procedures become available for general use or when engineering
changes occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should be
retained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a list
of all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.
Receiving updates
Technical Education & Documentation (TED) maintains a customer
database that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered or shipped
since the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also identified
in this database is a “key” individual (such as Documentation
Coordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updates
from TED as they are released.
To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it is
important that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.
Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to the
information in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),
please contact Technical Education & Documentation at:
MOTOROLA, INC.
Technical Education & Documentation
1 Nelson C. White Parkway
Mundelein, Illinois 60060
U.S.A.
Phone:
Within U.S.A. and Canada 800-872-8225. . . . .
Outside of U.S.A. and Canada +1-847-435–5700. .
FAX: +1-847-435–5541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
xiv
Reporting manual errors
In the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in your
manual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure to
include your name and address, the complete manual title and part
number (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the page
number (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,
and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. We
appreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.
General Safety
08/15/2000 xv
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Remember! . . . Safety
depends on you!!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all
phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in
this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers
of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow
these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe
operation of the equipment in your operating environment.
Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be
connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a
three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged
into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a
three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact
adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an
electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and
mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Do not operate in an explosive
atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or
fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment
constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:
Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service
Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove
equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component
replacement, or any internal adjustment.
Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certain
conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
removed.
Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
General Safety – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
xvi
Use caution when exposing or
handling the CRT
Breakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity
scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,
avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be
handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety
mask and gloves.
Do not substitute parts or
modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install
substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Dangerous procedure
warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous
procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the
warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety
precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment
in your operating environment.
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this
equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and
adjusting.
WARNING
Revision History
08/15/2000 xvii
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Manual Number
68P09250A99–1
Manual Title
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Release 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.x
Version Information
The following table lists the manual version , date of version, and
remarks on the version.
Version
Level Date of
Issue Remarks
–1 08/15/2000 Initial draft
Patent Notification
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
xviii
Patent numbers
This product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of the
following patents and other patents pending:
4128740 4661790 4860281 5036515 5119508 5204876 5247544 5301353
4193036 4667172 4866710 5036531 5121414 5204977 5251233 5301365
4237534 4672657 4870686 5038399 5123014 5207491 5255292 5303240
4268722 4694484 4872204 5040127 5127040 5210771 5257398 5303289
4282493 4696027 4873683 5041699 5127100 5212815 5259021 5303407
4301531 4704734 4876740 5047762 5128959 5212826 5261119 5305468
4302845 4709344 4881082 5048116 5130663 5214675 5263047 5307022
4312074 4710724 4885553 5055800 5133010 5214774 5263052 5307512
4350958 4726050 4887050 5055802 5140286 5216692 5263055 5309443
4354248 4729531 4887265 5058136 5142551 5218630 5265122 5309503
4367443 4737978 4893327 5060227 5142696 5220936 5268933 5311143
4369516 4742514 4896361 5060265 5144644 5222078 5271042 5311176
4369520 4751725 4910470 5065408 5146609 5222123 5274844 5311571
4369522 4754450 4914696 5067139 5146610 5222141 5274845 5313489
4375622 4764737 4918732 5068625 5152007 5222251 5276685 5319712
4485486 4764849 4941203 5070310 5155448 5224121 5276707 5321705
4491972 4775998 4945570 5073909 5157693 5224122 5276906 5321737
4517561 4775999 4956854 5073971 5159283 5226058 5276907 5323391
4519096 4797947 4970475 5075651 5159593 5228029 5276911 5325394
4549311 4799253 4972355 5077532 5159608 5230007 5276913 5327575
4550426 4802236 4972432 5077741 5170392 5233633 5276915 5329547
4564821 4803726 4979207 5077757 5170485 5235612 5278871 5329635
4573017 4811377 4984219 5081641 5170492 5235614 5280630 5339337
4581602 4811380 4984290 5083304 5182749 5239294 5285447 D337328
4590473 4811404 4992753 5090051 5184349 5239675 5287544 D342249
4591851 4817157 4998289 5093632 5185739 5241545 5287556 D342250
4616314 4827507 5020076 5095500 5187809 5241548 5289505 D347004
4636791 4829543 5021801 5105435 5187811 5241650 5291475 D349689
4644351 4833701 5022054 5111454 5193102 5241688 5295136 RE31814
4646038 4837800 5023900 5111478 5195108 5243653 5297161
4649543 4843633 5028885 5113400 5200655 5245611 5299228
4654655 4847869 5030793 5117441 5203010 5245629 5301056
4654867 4852090 5031193 5119040 5204874 5245634 5301188
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 1: Introduction
Table of Contents
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assumptions and Prerequisites 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Optimize? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is Optimization? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Happens During Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Optimize 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Installations 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Expansion 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Optimization 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repaired Sites 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment and Software 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Cable Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm–up 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment and Software 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Equipment 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Documents and Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Documents 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Equipment Identification 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Overview 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical BTS 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Components 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Assemblies and FRUs 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout
08/15/2000 1-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Manual Scope and Layout
This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and
audit tests of the Motorola SC4812ET Lite RF Base Transceiver Station
(BTS) equipment frame and its associated internal and external
interfaces. The following subjects are addressed: preliminary background
information; optimization, and alarm/redundancy tests; Acceptance Test
Procedures (ATP) to verify site operation and regulation compliance; site
turnover; troubleshooting.
Most applications use the same test procedure for all equipment
variations. However, decision break points are provided throughout the
procedure when equipment–specific tests are required. For example,
when tests using external test equipment are performed instead of those
using the RFDS, additional test procedures and illustrations are provided
to cover both applications.
This optimization procedure consists of a group of task-oriented tests.
Each major test category (Audit, Initial power–up, Calibration tests, etc.)
is described in chapters which are broken down into multi-page “maps.”
Each “map” typically consists of pages containing all the information
necessary to perform the test (including all required input levels, output
levels, CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (CDMA LMF) commands,
and test points required). Also described are some of the main concepts
you must understand in the test process. Whenever possible, graphics,
flowcharts, or other examples complement the information/steps.
Assumptions and Prerequisites
This document assumes that the BTS frames and cabling have been
installed per the BTS Frame Installation Manual – 68P09226A18, which
covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC series equipment frames, and
the BTS Hardware Installation Manual – 68P09252A36, which covers
BTS–specific cabling configurations.
1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-2
Document Composition
This document covers the following major areas:
SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such
as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be
considered by the Cellular Field Engineer CFE before performing
optimization or tests.
SPreliminary Operations, consisting of jumper configuration of BTS
sub–assemblies, pre–power–up tests, initial application of power to
the BTS equipment frames, and initial power–up tests.
SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of procedures for downloading
all BTS processor boards, test equipment setup, RF path verification,
BLO calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency
Diagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.
SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP tests,
executed by the CDMA LMF, and used to verify all major TX and RX
performance characteristics on all BTS equipment. This chapter also
covers generating an ATP report.
SPrepare to Leave the Site, discussing site turnover after ATP is
completed.
SBasic Troubleshooting, consisting of procedures to perform when an
ATP fails, as well as when incorrect results are obtained during logon,
test equipment operation, calibration, and GPS operation.
SAppendices that contain pertinent PN offset, frequency programming,
and output power data tables, along with additional data sheets that are
filled out manually by the CFE at the site.
1
Purpose of the Optimization
08/15/2000 1-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Why Optimize?
Proper optimization and calibration ensures that:
SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.
SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.
What Is Optimization?
Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal
equipment variations. Site optimization guarantees that the combined
losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-in
tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate and cause improper site
operation.
What Happens During
Optimization
Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for each receive
and transmit path at the BTS site, and stores these values in a database.
SA receive path (RX) starts at the ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX
directional coupler antenna feedline port and travels through the RX
input port on the top of the frame, through the bandpass filter, MPC
and additional splitter circuitry, ending at a Broad Band Transceiver
(BBX) backplane slot in the CDMA Channel Processor (CCP) shelf.
SA transmit path (TX) starts at the BBX backplane slot, is routed
through the BBX I/O to the TX Combiner, travels through the ELPA,
and ends either at an antenna port on top of the frame or RFDS TX
directional coupler antenna feedline port.
Six of the seven BBX2 boards in each S–CCP shelf are optimized to
specific RX and TX antenna ports. The seventh BBX2 board acts in a
redundant capacity for BBX2 boards 1 through 6, and is optimized to all
antenna ports. A single value is generated for each complete path,
thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would occur from
individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of each element
in the path.
BTS equipment factors in these values internally, leaving only
site–specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics to be
factored in by the CFE when determining site ERP output power
requirements.
1
When to Optimize
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-4
New Installations
After the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.
This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial
power–up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation and
verifying transmit and receive paths.
Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performance
verification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, and
download of accumulated calibration data.
A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed any time
after optimization to verify BTS calibration.
After optimization, a series of manual pre–Acceptance Test Procedure
(ATP) verification tests are performed to verify alarm/redundancy
performance.
After manual pre–ATP verification tests, a series of ATPs are performed
to verify BTS performance. An ATP is also required before the site can
be placed in service.
Site Expansion
Optimization is also required after expansion of a site.
Periodic Optimization
Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the
requirements of the overall system.
Repaired Sites
Refer to Appendix B for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATP
Test Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must be
performed any time a BTS subassembly or RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
IMPORTANT
*
1
Required Test Equipment and Software
08/15/2000 1-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Policy
To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,
test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteria
should be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, of
course, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipment
meets the same technical specifications.
It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurement
variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced
as a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization or
troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on hand
and operating properly.
Test Equipment Calibration
Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment
service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.
Follow the original equipment manufacture (OEM) recommended
maintenance and calibration schedules closely.
Test Cable Calibration
Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. It is
recommended that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test
cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss
within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable
insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.
Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the CDMA
LMF during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate
test cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the
characterization information prior to field optimization.
Equipment Warm–up
After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and
turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as
possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed up for
a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDS
calibration procedures:
SCommunications test set.
SRubidium time base.
SPower meter.
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-6
Required Test Equipment and
Software
The following test equipment and software is required for the
optimization procedure. You will also need common assorted tools such
as screwdrivers and frame keys. Read the owner’s manual for all of the
test equipment to understand its individual operation before using the
tool in the optimization.
Always refer to specific OEM test equipment
documentation for detailed operating instructions.
NOTE
CDMA LMF Hardware Requirements
A CDMA LMF computer platform that meets the following
requirements (or better) is recommended:
SNotebook computer
S266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processor
S4 Gbyte internal hard disk drive
SSVGA 12.1–inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768
(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution
S64 MB RAM minimum (128 MB recommended)
S20X CD–ROM drive
S3 1/2 inch floppy drive
S56kbps V.90 modem
SSerial port (COM 1)
SParallel port (LPT 1)
SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)
with a 10BaseT–to–coax adapter
SWindows 98 Second Edition (SE) operating system
If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the CDMA LMF
window must be maximized after it is displayed.
NOTE
CDMA LMF Software
The CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based Local
Maintenance Facility (LMF). This software product is specifically
designed to provide cellular communications field personnel the vehicle
to support the following CDMA Base Transceiver Stations (BTS)
operations:
SInstallation
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
08/15/2000 1-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
SMaintenance
SCalibration
SOptimization
Ethernet LAN Transceiver
(part of
CGDSLMFCOMPAQNOV96)
SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter
3COM Model – Etherlink III 3C589B
used with
STransition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2
Converter (or equivalent)
Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or its equivalent can also be used
to interface the CDMA LMF Ethernet connection to the
RFM frame.
NOTE
RS–232 to GPIB interface
SNational Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X
RS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the CDMA LMF to
the test equipment.
SA standard RS–232 cable can be used with the following
modifications:
–Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the others as it
is a driver output. The DTR is already a driver output signal. The
other pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 on each cable end:
9–pin D (female) 9–pin D (female)
GND 5 5 GND
RX 3
3 RXTX 2
2 TX
RTS 7 7 RTS
RSD/DCD 1 1 RSD/DCD
DTR 4 4 DTR
DSR 6 6 DSR
Model SLN2006A MMI interface kit
SMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on
opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null
modem transformation between cables. This board can used for
10–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin, and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.
SMotorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent ; used to interface
the CDMA LMF serial port connection to the GLI, CSM, ETIB board,
and module debug serial ports.
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-8
Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog
The following communications system analyzers are supported by the
LMF:
SMotorola CyberTest
SAdvantest R3465 Analyzer with R3561L Signal Generator
SHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A/600 Analyzer including 83203B
CDMA Interface, manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCS
Interface for 1900 MHz BTSs.
SHewlett Packard Model HP 8935 Analyzer
or a combination of test equipment supported by the CDMA LMF and
used during optimization and testing of the RF communications portion
of BTS equipment.
The analyzer provides the following functions:
SFrequency counter.
SDeviation meter.
SRF power meter (average and code domain).
SRF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation).
SAudio signal generator.
SAC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and high
impedance input mode).
SNoise measurement meter.
SC–Message filter.
SSpectrum analyzer.
SCDMA code domain analyzer.
GPIB cables
Hewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; one or two meters long, used to
interconnect test equipment and CDMA LMF terminal.
Power meter
SHewlett Packard Model HP437B with HP8481A power sensor capable
of measuring from –30 dBm to 20 dBm,
or
SGigatronics 8542B power meter.
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
08/15/2000 1-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Timing reference cables
STwo Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; right
angle MCX–male to standard BNC–male RG316 cables; 10 ft. long
are required to interconnect the HP8921A/600 Communications
Analyzer to SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timing
references,
or
STwo BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 feet) long,
used to interconnect the HP8921A/600 Communications Analyzer to
SGLN4132B and SGLN1145B (and later) CSM front panel timing
references in the RF Modem Frame.
Digital multimeter
Fluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for
precision DC and AC measurements to four decimal places.
Directional coupler
Narda Model 3020A 20 dB coupler terminated with two Narda Model
375BN–M loads, or equivalent.
RF attenuators
S20 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–20), used in conjunction
with calibration of test cables or during general troubleshooting
procedures.
S10 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–10), for cable calibration
with a Cybertest CDMA analyzer.
Miscellaneous RF adapters, loads, etc.
As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for various
test setups. Should include at least (2) 50 Ohm loads (type N) for
calibration and (1) RF short.
RF load
100W non–radiating RF load used (as required) to provide dummy RF
loading during BTS transmit tests.
High–impedance conductive wrist strap
Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from ESD when
handling or working with modules.
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-10
Optional Equipment
This section provides a list of additional equipment that might be
required during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.
Not all optional equipment specified in this section will be
supported by the CDMA LMF in automated tests.
NOTE
Duplexer
Filtronics Low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or equivalent; used during
Spectral Purity Receive band noise tests.
Frequency counter
Stanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent; used if direct
measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.
Spectrum analyzer
Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or
equivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive band
spectral purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed by
the CDMA LMF.
LAN tester
Model NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to
supplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.
Span line (T1/E1) verification equipment
As required for the local application.
RF test cable (if not provided with test equipment)
Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the BTS
transmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshooting
procedures.
Oscilloscope
Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,
timing, and measurements, or during general troubleshooting procedures.
2–way splitter
Mini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; used to provide the
diversity receive input to the BTS.
CDMA subscriber mobile or portable radiotelephone
Safco Model 2136–150 with power supply and antenna; used to provide
test transmission and reception during BTS maintenance and
1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued
08/15/2000 1-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
troubleshooting. Do not substitute other models that do not feature
special test modes. Two radios will be required for system and
drive–around testing after optimization and BTS ATP are completed.
RF circulator
Circulator (FERROCOM 5809866C01) or equivalent; can substitute for
a duplexer during Receive sensitivity FER testing in conjunction with
Safco CDMA mobile.
High stability 10 MHz rubidium standard
Stanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM and
LFR/HSO frequency verification.
1
Required Documents and Related Publications
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-12
Required Documents
The following documents are required to perform optimization of the
cell site equipment:
SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which
includes:
– General site information
– Floor plan
– RF power levels
– Frequency plan (includes Site PN and operating frequencies)
– Channel allocation (paging, traffic, etc.)
– Board placement
– Site wiring list
–Site–specific CDF file
SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)
SEquipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment
SCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part number 68P64114A21)
Related Publications
Additional, detailed information about the installation, operation, and
maintenance of the SC4812ET Lite BTS is included in the following
publications:
1
Terms and Abbreviations
08/15/2000 1-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Overview
Standard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined in
Cellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms – 68P09213A95. Any
non–standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed in
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations
Term or Abbreviation Definition
1
BTS Equipment Identification
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-14
Equipment Overview
The SC4812ETL BTS consists of a single, outdoor, weatherized cabinet
containing RF and power components. The BTS is functionally similar
to the two–cabinet SC4812ET, but provides more flexibility in site
selection because of its smaller footprint and lighter weight. The BTS is
powered by 220 Vac, rectified internally to +27 Vdc, and can support
two carriers in a 3–sector configuration. An SC4812ETL starter frame
with the maximum of one SC4812ETL expansion frame can support 4
carriers in a 3–sector configuration. Six– sector operation is not
supported with any SC4812ETL configuration.
The BTS cabinet houses the fan modules, RF compartment heat
exchanger, Simplified CDMA Channel Processor shelf (S–CCP), RF
Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) modules, LPA trunking modules,
bandpass filters, 2:1 combiners, and Duplexer/Receive Filter/Directional
Couplers (DRDC). Power components include a +27 Vdc Power
Distribution Assembly (PDA), backup batteries, battery heaters,
rectifiers, an AC Load Center (ACLC), and one duplex GFCI 115 Vac
utility outlet.
Logical BTS
A logical BTS can consist of up to two SC4812ETL frames. When the
LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logical BTS, access is available to all
devices in all of the frames that make up the logical BTS. A logical BTS
CDF file that includes equippage information for all of the logical BTS
frames and their devices is required. A CBSC file that includes channel
data for all of the logical BTS frames is also required.
The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (e.g., BTS–812–1) and
the second frame of the logical BTS is numbered with the suffix, –101
(e. g. BTS–812–101). When the CDMA LMF is logged into a BTS, a
FRAME tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for
the BTS, there will only be one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1 for
BTS–282). If a logical BTS has more than one frame, there will be a
separate FRAME tab for each frame (e.g. FRAME–438–1, and
FRAME–438–101 for BTS–438 that has both frames). If an RFDS is
included in the CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) will be
displayed.
Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one or
more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen for
information on how to select devices.
SCCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers
All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a
single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers
dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to
Table 1-2, Table 1-3, and Figure 1-4 for specific SCCP Shelf Device ID
numbers.
1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued
08/15/2000 1-15
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 1-2: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers
(Top Shelf)
Frame
#
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
#Power
(PS–1) Power
(PS–2) AMR
–1 GLI2
–1 MCC2 BBX2 BBX2
–R MPC/
EMPC
–1
1 – – 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 R1 –
101 – – 101 101 101 102 101 102 103 R101 –
Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)
Frame
#
Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)
#HSO/
LFR CSM
–1 CSM
–2 CCD
ACCD
BAMR
–2 GLI2–
2MCC2 BBX2 SW MPC/
EMPC
–2
1 – 1 2 – – – 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 – –
101 –101 102 – – – 102 102 107 108 107 108 109 – –
Figure 1-1: Typical Logical BTS Configurations
BTSSPAN 110
Two Frame Configuration
Frame
1Frame
101
BTSSPAN 1
AB A
1
Cabinet Identification
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-16
Major Components
Figure 1-2 illustrates the features of the BTS Cabinet, the single major
component of the Motorola SC4812ETL.
Figure 1-2: SC4812ETL Cabinet
Main Door
Battery Compartment Door
(Can only be opened after Main Door is open) RF Interface Panel
SCCP Shelf Backplane
Rear Access Panel
Power Entry
and
Network Interface Compartment
SC4812ETL0001–1
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification
08/15/2000 1-17
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Internal Assemblies and FRUs
Figure 1-3 shows the location of the internal assemblies and Field
Replaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item is found in
the following paragraphs.
Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs
(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity)
LPAs
SCCP Fans
LPA Trunking
Module
RFDS
SCCP Shelf
Filter/Combiner
Shelf (Bandpass
filters shown)
ETIB
DRDC
Shelf
CSU
Rectifier Meter
Alarm Panel
Rectifiers
DC PDA
ACLC GFCI Utility
Outlet
Span I/O
Board LPAC
Backup Batteries
(Heaters underneath batteries)
External Blower
Assembly
SC4812ETL0002–1
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-18
Duplexer/Directional Coupler (DRDC)
The DRDC combines, in a single module, the functions of antenna
duplexing, receive band pass filtering, and surge protection (see
Figure 1-6).
Filter/Combiner Shelf (Bandpass Filters or 2:1 Combiners)
The Filter/Combiner Shelf holds the transmit band pass filters or 2:1
combiners, depending on system configuration.
Simplified CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) Shelf
The SCCP shelf contains the following (see Figure 1-4):
SHigh Stability Oscillator (HSO)/LFR (Optional) card
SClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) on 2 cards (one with GPS
receiver, if ordered).
SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)
SPower Supply cards (2)
SMulticoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) (2)
SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)
SMulti–Channel CDMA (MCC24) cards (up to 4)
SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2) cards (up to 6 with one redundant)
SCombined Input/Output (CIO) (1)
SGroup Line Interface (GLI2) cards (2)
SBBX2 Switch card (1)
SFiller Panel
SFan Module (2)
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
08/15/2000 1-19
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf
FILLER POWER 1 POWER 2
HSO/LFR CSM 1 CSM 2 CCD AMR GLI2
1 2
3 4
MCC
1 2 3
4 5 6
BBX2 R1
SWITCH
1
2
1
2
1
2
MPC
FILLER POWER 1 POWER 2
HSO/LFR CSM 101 CSM 102 CCD AMR GLI2
101 102
MCC
101 102 103
BBX2 R101
SWITCH
102
1
2
MPC
101 101
102 103 104 104 105 106
MPC
CSM
Power Supply
Power Supply
MPC
CSM
CCDCCD
AMR
HSO
AMR
GLI2 GLI2
MCC24
MCC24
MCC24
MCC24
BBX2
BBX2
BBX2
BBX2
BBX2
BBX2
SWITCH
19mm Filler Panel
BBX2
CIO
FRAME 1
FRAME 101
(Expansion Frame)
SC4812ETL0003–1
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-20
Punch Block
The Punch Block is the interface between the cabinet and the T1/E1 span
lines, the Customer I/O, alarms, multi–cabinet timing (RGPS and
RHSO), and Pilot Beacon control (optional).
Span I/O Board
The Span I/O Board provides the interface for the span lines from the
CSU to the SCCP backplane (see Figure 1-3).
RF Diagnostic Subsystem (RFDS)
The RFDS provides the capability for remotely monitoring the status of
the SC4812ETL RF transmit and receive paths (Figure 1-6).
Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger provides cooling to the cabinet RF compartment.
The fan speed of the heat exchanger adjusts automatically with
temperature. The heat exchanger is located in the cabinet main door.
SC4812ETL Interface Board (ETIB) and LPA Control (LPAC)
Board
The ETIB is an interconnect module with status LEDs, MMI receptacles,
and secondary surge protection for the LPA modules. The LPAC board
provides the interface for LPA connections (See Figure 1-3).
SC4812ETL Trunking Modules
The trunking modules contain a complex, passive RF network that
allows RF signals to share the resources of a bank of four LPAs. They
also provides DC power and digital interconnect (See Figure 1-3).
Batteries
The batteries provide +24Vdc backup to the cabinet should AC power be
lost. The cabinet can accommodate a total of 12 12V batteries,
configured in six series–connected strings of two batteries each. The
time duration of backup provided depends on system configuration (See
Figure 1-3).
Battery Heaters
The battery heater pads warm the batteries to provide improved
cold–weather performance. A separate heater pad is required for each
battery string, and is located between each battery string and its
respective support shelf. The number of heaters is dependent on system
configuration (See Figure 1-3).
Rectifiers
The rectifiers convert AC power supplied to the cabinet to +27Vdc to
power the cabinet and maintain the charge of the backup batteries (See
Figure 1-3).
1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued
08/15/2000 1-21
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
AC Load Center (ACLC)
The ACLC is the cabinet entry point for AC power. It incorporates AC
power distribution and surge protection (See Figure 1-3).
Figure 1-5: RF Interface Panel
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
SC48120004–1
Figure 1-6: RFDS and DRDC Details
BTS
CPLD
ANT
CPLD DRDC
RFDS
SC48120005–1
1
BTS Sector Configurations
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-22
Sector Configuration
There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-4
outlines the basic requirements. For more detailed information also see
Table 1-5 and Figure 1-7. When carrier capacity is greater than two, a
2:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers, bandpass
filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on sectorization and
channel sequencing.
Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration
Number of
Carriers Number of
Sectors Channel Spacing Filter Requirements
1 3 N/A Bandpass Filter or Cavity Combiner (2:1)
2 3 Non–adjacent Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner (2:1)
2 3 Adjacent Bandpass Filter (preferred), Cavity Combiner (2:1)
The matrix in Table 1-5 shows a correlation between the various sector
configurations and BBX cards.
1
BTS Sector Configurations – continued
08/15/2000 1-23
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 1-5: Sector Configurations
Configuation Description
1
3–Sector / 1 Carrier
The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters or 2:1 combiners for a 3–sector/1–carrier
frame.
1
ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B3
TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #
BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1
3–Sector / 2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers
The configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 cavity combiners for 3–sectors/2–carriers for
non–adjacent channels.
2ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B3
2
TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #
BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1
BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 N/A N/A N/A 2
3–Sector / 2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers
The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for non–adjacent
channels.
3ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B3
3
TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #
BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1
N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 2
3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT Carriers
The configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for adjacent
channels.
4ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B3
4
TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #
BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1
N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 2
3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT Carriers
The configuration below maps RX and TX with optional 2:1 cavity combiners for 3–sectors/2–carriers for
adjacent channels. Note that dual 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6 total).
5ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B3
5
TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #
BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1
N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 2
1
BTS Sector Configurations – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
1-24
Figure 1-7: SC4812ETL LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters
Table 1-5
Configuration Numbers 1, 3, 4 Table 1-5
Configuration Numbers 2, 5
3–Sector
Bandpass Filters 3–Sector
2:1 Cavity Combiners
CARRIER 1
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
CARRIER 2
SECTOR 1, 2, 3
SC4812ETL0011–1
1
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations
Table of Contents
Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell Site Types 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDF 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Frame SCCP Shelf Configuration Switch 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Power Up 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Tools 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Inspection 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection and Setup 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power–Up Sequence 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Application Pre-test 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying AC Power 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cabinet Power Up Tests 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
2
Preliminary Operations: Overview
08/15/2000 2-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying
module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switch
settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS
application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are
presented.
Cellsite Types
Sites are configured as 3–sectored with one or two carriers. Each type
has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
CDF
The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data
information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The
number of BTS frames, BBX2 and MCC24 boards, and linear power
amplifier assignments are some of the equipage data included in the
CDF.
Site Equipage Verification
Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data
to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect
and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and
ancillary equipment frame.
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placed
on a conductive surface or back into the anti–static bag it
was shipped in.
CAUTION
Initial Installation of
Boards/Modules
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Step Action
1Refer to the site documentation and slide all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as
required. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.
2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number
Checklist” in the site logbook.
2
Preliminary Operations: Overview – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
2-2
Setting Frame SCCP Shelf
Configuration Switch
If the frame is a Starter BTS, the backplane switch settings behind the
right–hand SCCP shelf fan module should be set to the ON position (see
Figure 2-1).
The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the
BTS equipment.
Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings
ON
OFF
EXPANSION
FRAME 1
SETTING
BOTTOM / TOP
RIGHT / LEFT
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
SC 4812ETL
SCCP SHELF
FAN MODULE
REMOVED
ON
OFF STARTER FRAME
SC4812ETL0006–1
2
Initial Power Up
08/15/2000 2-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
The following information is used to check for any electrical short
circuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cell site and
BTS power supply units before applying power for the first time. It
contains instructional information on the proper initial power up
procedures for the SC4812ETL. Please pay attention to all cautions and
warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury to personnel.
Required Tools
The following tools are used in the procedures.
SDC current clamp (600 Amp capability with jaw size to accommodate
2/0 cable).
SHot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)
SDigital Multimeter (DMM)
Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems
Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly
connected:
SReceive RF cabling – up to six RX cables
STransmit RF cabling – up to three TX cables
For DC power applications (+27 V):
SThe positive power cable is red.
SThe negative power cable is black. (The black power
cable is at ground potential.)
IMPORTANT
*
Initial Inspection and Setup
Ensure all battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) for
unused battery positions are off (pulled out) before and
during the entire power up process. Leave these breakers in
the off position when leaving the site.
CAUTION
Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup
Step Action
1Verify that ALL AC Load Center (ACLC) and DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA) circuit
breakers are turned OFF.
2Confirm that the external 220 Vac supply is correctly connected to the ACLC input.
2
Initial Power Up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
2-4
Failure to properly connect the external AC power cable
will damage the surge protection module inside the AC
load center.
CAUTION
Power–Up Sequence
The first task in the power–up sequence is to apply external AC power to
the cabinet. Once power is applied, a series of AC Voltage measurements
is required.
Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements
Step Action
1Gain access to the ACLC external power connection terminals from the rear of the cabinet by opening
the power entry compartment access door and removing the ACLC rear cover (see Figure 2-2).
2Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to
120 Vac.
3Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to
120 Vac.
4Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to
120 Vac.
5Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to
120 Vac.
6Measure L1 – L2 – should be from 208 to 240 Vac.
If the AC voltages are in excess of 120 V (or exceed 200
V) when measuring between terminals L1 or L2 to neutral
or ground, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of
the higher voltages are determined. The cabinet WILL be
damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive
voltage on the inputs.
CAUTION
2
Initial Power Up – continued
08/15/2000 2-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Figure 2-2: AC Load Center External Power Connections
G= Ground
N = Neutral
L1 = Line 1
L2 = Line 2
G
N
L2
L1
(Power entry compartment
door not shown for clarity)
Remove torx screw to
remove ACLC rear cover.
SC4812ETL0007–1
Battery compartment
+ DC feedthroughs
2
Initial Power Up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
2-6
Figure 2-3: Cabinet Power Subassemblies
LPAs
SCCP Fans
RFDS
SCCP Shelf
ETIB
Meter Alarm
Panel With
TCU
AC Rectifiers
DC PDA
ACLC GFCI Utility
Outlet Backup Batteries
(Heaters underneath batteries)
External Blower
Assembly
SC4812ETL0002–2
Battery Shelf
Circuit Breakers
2
Initial Power Up – continued
08/15/2000 2-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Figure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel
LEDs
SC4812ETL0008–1
Figure 2-5: DC Power Distribution Assembly
SC4812ETL0009–1
Power Application Pre-test Before applying any power to the BTS cabinet, follow the procedure in
Table 2-4 to verify there are no shorts in the DC power distribution
system.
The following procedure is required only on initial BTS
power–up or following maintenace when any major power
components (e.g., DC PDA, ACLC) were replaced or DC
power cables were disconnected.
NOTE
2
Initial Power Up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
2-8
Table 2-4: Pre–power DC Power Distribution System Test
Step Action
1Physically verify that circuit breakers on the ACLC (Figure 2-4) and DC PDA (figure Figure 2-5), and
all battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3), are OFF.
2Visually ensure that all AC rectifier modules (Figure 2-3) are not powered (DC, Power, and bar graph
LEDs are not lighted).
3Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus
bars. There should be no 27 Vdc present.
4In the cabinet RF and LPA compartments, unseat all circuit boards/ modules (except CCD and CIO
cards) in the SCCP shelf and Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) shelves, but leave them in their respective
slots.
5Inside the battery compartment, measure the resistance between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus
bars. Verify that the resistance measures > 500 Ω.
SIf reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the
breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or
missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).
6On the DC PDA, set the Main Breaker #1 (Internal) to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeat
step 5.
* IMPORTANT
If, after inserting any board/module, the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω, a short probably exists in that
board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the
problem before proceeding.
7Repeat step 6 for Main Breaker #2, and each LPA circuit breaker.
8! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
– (in +27 volt systems)
Insert and lock the PS1 DC–DC converter module into its slot, and repeat step 5.
SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge, finally
indicating approximately 500 Ω.
9Repeat step 8 for the PS2 converter module and all remaining modules in the SCCP shelf.
10 On the DC PDA, set the LPA 1A–1B circuit breaker to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeat
step 5.
11 Repeat step 10 for each of the three remaining LPA circuit breakers.
12 Seat all LPAs into their respective slots in the shelves one at a time. Repeat step 5 after seating each
LPA.
SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
. . . continued on next page
2
Initial Power Up – continued
08/15/2000 2-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 2-4: Pre–power DC Power Distribution System Test
Step Action
13 Seat the Pilot Beacon, Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options circuit breakers to ON one at a time.
Repeat step 5 after pushing in each circuit breaker.
14 Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out).
Applying AC Power
Once AC voltage measurements are complete, apply AC power to the
Power Cabinet. Table 2-5 provides the procedure for applying AC
power.
Table 2-5: Applying AC Power
Step Action
1After cabinet AC input voltages are verified as correct, turn the Main AC breaker (located on the front
of the AC Load Center) ON. Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are
illuminated (see Figure 2-4).
2On the ACLC, Turn RECT. 1 and RECT. 2 AC branch breakers ON. All the installed rectifier
modules (see Figure 2-3) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs should light on each.
3Turn the Meter Alarm Panel module, ON (see Figure 2-6). The Meter Alarm Panel voltage meter
should read approximately 27.4 + 0.2 VDC.
4Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) ON, (see Figure 2-7). Verify that the Meter Alarm
Control Panel does not have any alarm LEDs illuminated.
5Check the rectifier current bargraph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). None
should be illuminated at this point.
If batteries are fitted, turn on the two battery heater AC
breakers on the AC Load Center.
NOTE
Figure 2-6: Meter Alarm Panel
OFF
VOLT
VOLT
–
+
TEST POINTS
AMPS
–
+
TEST POINTS
AMP
PWR
ON
FRONT VIEW
2
Initial Power Up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
2-10
Figure 2-7: Temperature Compensation Panel
OFF
V ADJ
SENSOR 25_ c
SENSE
–
+
COM
ON
ON
FRONT VIEW
1/2 A 250V
12
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PANEL
Power Cabinet Power Up Tests
Table 2-6 lists the step–by–step instructions for Power Up Tests.
Table 2-6: Cabinet DC Power–Up Tests
Step Action
1 Ensure ALL DC PDA circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).
2Be sure the procedures in Table 2-4 (if required) and (Table 2-5) have been performed.
3Probe the VOLT TEST POINTS on the Meter Alarm Panel while pressing the 25° C set button on the
TCP (see Figure 2-7). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC. Adjust Master Voltage on Meter
Alarm Panel if necessary. Release the TCP 25° C set button.
4Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 V
compared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it is
warmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.
5If the BTS is equipped with a internal backup batteries, close (push in) DC PDA Main Breaker #1
(Internal) and proceed to step 7.
6If the BTS is connected to an external BOE containing backup batteries, close (push in) DC PDA
Main Breaker #2 (External).
7Inside the power entry compartment at the rear of the cabinet, measure the voltage between the + (red)
terminals of the filtered DC battery compartment feedthrough (Figure 2-2) and chassis ground,
observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage should be the same as the measurement in step 2.
8Measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars in the battery compartment.
Place the probe at the bottom of the bus bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should
measure the same as the previous step.
9On the DC PDA(see Figure 2-5) set the circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at
a time in the following sequence:
SPS1 and PS2 circuit breakers
SLPA circuit breakers (four breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 2C–2D).
SHEAT EXCHANGER circuit breakers (two breakers)
SETIB circuit breaker
SPILOT BEACON circuit breaker
SOPTION circuit breaker
2
Initial Power Up – continued
08/15/2000 2-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Battery Charge Test
(Connected Batteries)
Table 2-7 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the batteries.
Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)
Step Action
1Close the battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) for connected batteries ONLY. This process should
be completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings with excess charge current
NOTE
If the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individually
due to the surge current. If this condition is observed, turn off the Meter Alarm Panel power switch,
and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers, the Meter Alarm Panel power switch
should then be turned ON.
2Using the DC current probe, measure the current in each of the battery string connections to the
battery cabinet bus bars. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly reduce in a few
minutes if the batteries have a typical new battery charge level.
NOTE
The bar graph meters on the AC rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of the total battery
charge current. Each rectifier module bar graph has eight (8) LEDs to represent the output current.
Each illuminated LED indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8 or 8.75 Amps) of the rectifiers
maximum (70 Amps) current is flowing.
EXAMPLE:
Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bargraph LEDs
illuminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?
Answer: Each bargraph is approximately indicating 12.5% of 70 Amps, therefore, 3 X 8.75 equals
26.25 Amps. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 X 26.25 A) 78.75
Amps.
This charge current calculation only applies at this part of the start up procedure, when the RF Cabinet
is not powered on, and the power cabinet heat exchanger is turned off.
3The current in each string should be approximately equal (+ 5 amps).
4Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any further
action. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the current
in each string should reduce to less than 5A.
5Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the Power Up
Test.
NOTE
If discharged batteries are installed, all bargraphs may be illuminated on the rectifiers during the
charge test. This indicates that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries.
It is recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above
step before commissioning the site. This could take several hours.
2
Initial Power Up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
2-12
Battery Discharge Test
Perform the test procedure in Table 2-8 only when the battery current is
less than 5 A per string. Refer to Table 2-7 on the procedures for
checking current levels.
Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test
Step Action
1Turn the battery test switch on the Meter Alarm Panel, ON (see Figure 2-6). The rectifier output
voltage and current should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms
for the Meter Alarm Panel may occur.
2Measure the individual battery string current using the DC current probe. The battery discharge
current in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 A).
3Turn Battery Test Switch OFF.
Failure to turn OFF the Battery Test Switch before leaving
the site will result in low battery capacity and reduce
battery life.
CAUTION
2
Initial Power Up – continued
08/15/2000 2-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Core
Heat Exchanger
Assembly
Blower
Power
Cord
Bottom (Ambient) Blower
Fan Module
T–30 Screw
Mounting
Bracket
Figure 2-8: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers
OUT=OFF
IN=ON
Heat Exchanger
Blower Assembly
Circuit Breaker
Side View
DC PDA
Mounting
Bracket
T–30 Screw
Top (Internal) Blower
Fan Module
Blower
Power
Cord
2
Initial Power Up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
2-14
Notes
2
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration
Table of Contents
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Process 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell Site Types 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cell Site Data File (CDF) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS System Software Download 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Equipage Verification 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Channel Service Unit 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the LMF 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Installation and Update Procedures 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication . . . . . .
3-12
Folder Structure Overview 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wlmf Folder 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cdma Folder 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bts–nnn Folders 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bts–nnn.cal File 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bts–nnn.cdf File 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cbsc File 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
loads Folder 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
version Folder 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
code Folder 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data Folder 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using CDMA LMF 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic CDMA LMF Operation 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Into a BTS 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Out 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Online Help 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the Processors 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinging the BTS 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download the BTS 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select CSM Clock Source 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable CSMs 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable MCCs 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) System Time 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Frequency Verification 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Initialization/Verification 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm-up 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Set Calibration 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Test Equipment 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-55. . . . .
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-56. .
Calibrating Test Equipment 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Cable Loss Values 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Calibrate BLOs 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Path Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLO Calibration Data File 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download BLO Procedure 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Introduction 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Table of Contents – continued
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Transmit (TX) Path Audit 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Audit Test 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Cal/Audit Test 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create CAL File 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Description 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Parameter Settings 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM 3-77. .
Valid NAM Ranges 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Antenna Map Data 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFDS Calibration 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program TSU NAM 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms Testing 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Reporting Display 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Alarm 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Fail Alarm 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minor Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Alarms 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Rectifier Failure
(Six Rectifier System) 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving the site 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
3
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction
08/15/2000 3-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
This chapter provides procedures for downloading system operating
software, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM reference
verification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
IMPORTANT
*
Optimization Process
After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations
(power up) have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrate
and optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process can be
accomplished as follows:
SDownload MGLI2–1 with code and data and then enable MGLI2–1.
SUse the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of
the following types respond with status information: CSM2, BBX2,
GLI2, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device is
installed and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in
the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF file
will have to be corrected before the device can be accessed by CDMA
LMF.
SDownload code and data to all devices of the following types:
– CSM2
– BBX2
– GLI2 (other than MGLI2–1)
– MCC
SDownload the RFDS TSIC (if installed).
SVerify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.
SEnable the following devices (in the order listed):
– Secondary CSM (slot 2)
– Primary CSM (slot 1)
– All MCCs
SConnect the required test equipment for a full optimization.
SSelect the test equipment.
SCalibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been
calibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for the
optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be
entered manually.
SSelect all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full
optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX
3
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-2
calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests
for all selected devices.
SIf the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed
paths.
SIf the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the
failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.
SIf the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes
for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem that
caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TX
and RX tests have passed for all paths.
Cell Site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type
has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
Cell Site Data File (CDF)
The CDF includes the following information:
SDownload instructions and protocol
SSite specific equipage information
SC–CCP shelf allocation plan
– BBX2 equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy
– CSM equipage including redundancy
– Multi Channel Card 24 (MCC24 or MCC8E) channel element
allocation plan. This plan indicates how the C–CCP shelf is
configured, and how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access
channel elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among
the (up to 12) MCC24s or MCC8Es in the shelf.
SCSM equipage including redundancy
SEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a
transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and
government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the
antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and
antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required
power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX2 output
level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can
also be determined.
Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A21,
for additional information on the layout of the LMF
directory structure (including CDF file locations and
formats).
NOTE
3
Pre–Optimization: Introduction – continued
08/15/2000 3-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
BTS System Software
Download
BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS
processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating
code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.
Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct
bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files for the BTS must be
obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–# folder in the
LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF files can cause wrong
results. Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a
live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.
IMPORTANT
*
The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted
diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has
ftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide,
68P64114A21, or the LMF Help screen, for more information.
Site Equipage Verification
If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, and
review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data
in the CDF to the actual site hardware.
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal
and installation of any card/module. After removal, the
card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or
back into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.
CAUTION
3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-4
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans
At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and
place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span
surge protectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the
BTS.
IMPORTANT
*
Each frame is equipped with one 50 pair punch block for spans,
customer alarms, remote GPS, and power cabinet alarms. See Figure 3-2
and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin call–out
information. To disable the span, pull the surge protectors for the
respective span.
Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must
disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the BTS.
This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending control information
to the BTS during LMF based tests.
Configure Channel Service Unit
The M–PATH 537 channel service unit (CSU) provides in–band
SNMP–managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1 lines.
M–PATH units plug into the ADC Kentrox 2–slot frame (see
Figure 3-1).
Remote M–PATH management is available via SNMP over an in–band
data link on the T1 line (using a facility data link or 8–64 Kbps of a DS0
channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be an
SNMP manager or another M–PATH CSU.
Each 19 inch rack can support two CSU M–PATH 537 modules. Each
M–PATH 537 module supports a single span connection.
Programming of the M–PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9–pin
connector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a Microsoft
Windows programming disk is supplied with each unit.
3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
08/15/2000 3-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Setting the Control Port
Whichever control port is chosen, it must first be set up so the control
port switches match the communication parameters being used by the
control device. If using the rear–panel DTE control port, set the
shelf–address switch SA5 to “up” (leave the switch down for the
rear–panel DCE control port).
For more information, refer to the Kentrox Installation Guide, manual
number 65–77538001 which is provided with each CSU.
Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:
Part Number Description of Cable
01–95006–022 (six feet) DB–9S to DB–9P
01–95010–022 (ten feet)
The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:
SA PC using the AT 9–pin interface
SA modem using the 9–pin connector
SOther shelves in a daisy chain
Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU
REF. FW00212
Front View
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
DCE Connector
(Craft Port)
SLOT 1SLOT 2 T1 TERMINAL T1 TERMINAL
CONTROL
PORT GROUP
ADDRESS SHELF
ADDRESS
T1 DDS T1 DDS
DTE DCEDATA PORT DATA PORT
Back View
NETWORK NETWORK
To/From
Network To/From
GLI
To/From
Network To/From
GLI
3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-6
Alarm and Span Line Cable
Pin/Signal Information
See Figure 3-2 and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin
call–out information for the 50–pin punch block.
Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block
TOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCK
STRAIN RELIEVE INCOMING
CABLE TO BRACKET WITH
TIE WRAPS
2T
1T 1R 2T 2R
12
1R
2R
LEGEND
1T = PAIR 1 – TIP
1R = PAIR 1 –RING
” ”
” ”
” ”
Cabinet Power Entry
Compartment
50R
50T
49R
49T
1T
TO SPAN
CONNECTOR
TO ALARMS
CONNECTOR
TO MODEM
CONNECTOR
TO RGD/RGPS
CONNECTOR
SC4812ETL0010–1
3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
08/15/2000 3-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch Block
Site Component
Signal Name Pin Color
Power Cab Control – NC 1T Blue
Power Cab Control – NO 1R Blk/Blue
Power Cab Control – Com 2T Yellow
Reserved 2R N/C
Rectifier Fail 3T Blk/Yellow
AC Fail 3R Green
POWER CABINET
Power Cab Exchanger Fail 4T Blk/Grn
POWER
CABINET
Power Cab Door Alarm 4R White
Power Cab Major Alarm 5T Blk/Whit
Battery Over Temp 5R Red
Power Cab Minor Alarm 6T Blk/Red
Reticifier Over Temp 6R Brown
Power Cab Alarm Rtn 7T Blk/Brn
LFR_HSO_GND 7R
EXT_1PPS_POS 8T
EXT_1PPS_NEG 8R
LFR / HSO
CAL_+ 9T
LFR
/
HSO
CAB_– 9R
LORAN_+ 10T
LORAN_– 10R
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Minor 11T
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Rtn 11R
PILOT BEACON
Pilot Beacon Alarm – Major 12T
PILOT
BEACON
Pilot Beacon Control – NO 12R
Pilot Beacon Control–COM 13T
Pilot Beacon Control – NC 13R
. . . continued on next page
3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-8
Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch Block
Site Component
ColorPinSignal Name
Customer Outputs 1 – NO 14T
Customer Outputs 1 – COM 14R
Customer Outputs 1 – NC 15T
Customer Outputs 2 – NO 15R
Customer Outputs 2 – COM 16T
Customer Outputs 2 – NC 16R
Customer Outputs 3 – NO 17T
Customer Outputs 3 – COM 17R
Customer Outputs 3 – NC 18T
Customer Outputs 4 – NO 18R
Customer Outputs 4–COM 19T
Customer Outputs 4 – NC 19R
Customer Inputs 1 20T
Cust_Rtn_A_1 20R
Customer Inputs 2 21T
CUSTOMER
Cust_Rtn_A_2 21R
CUSTOMER
OUTPUTS / INPUTS
Customer Inputs 3 22T
Cust_Rtn_A_3 22R
Customer Inputs 4 23T
Cust_Rtn_A_4 23R
Customer Inputs 5 24T
Cust_Rtn_A_5 24R
Customer Inputs 6 25T
Cust_Rtn_A_6 25R
Customer Inputs 7 26T
Cust_Rtn_A_7 26R
Customer Inputs 8 27T
Cust_Rtn_A_8 27R
Customer Inputs 9 28T
Cust_Rtn_A_9 28R
Customer Inputs 10 29T
Cust_Rtn_A_10 29R
RVC_TIP_A 30T
RVC_RING_A 30R
XMIT_TIP_A 31T
XMIT_RING_A 31R
RVC_TIP_B 32T
RVC_RING_B 32R
XMIT_TIP_B 33T
XMIT_RING_B 33R
RVC_TIP_C 34T
RVC_RING_C 34R
XMIT_TIP_C 35T
SPAN
XMIT_RING_C 35R
SPAN
RVC_TIP_D 36T
RVC_RING_D 36R
XMIT_TIP_D 37T
XMIT_RING_D 37R
RVC_TIP_E 38T
RVC_RING_E 38R
XMIT_TIP_E 39T
XMIT_RING_E 39R
RVC_TIP_F 40T
RVC_RING_F 40R
XMIT_TIP_F 41T
XMIT_RING_F 41R
. . . continued on next page
3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued
08/15/2000 3-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch Block
Site Component
ColorPinSignal Name
GPS_POWER_1+ 42T Blue
GPS_POWER_1– 42R Bk/Blue
GPS_POWER_2+ 43T Yellow
GPS_POWER_2– 43R Bk/Yellow
GPS_RX+ 44T White
RGPS
GPS_RX– 44R White
RGPS
GPS_TX+ 45T Green
GPS_TX– 45R Green
Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T Red
Master Frame (TDR–) 46R Bk/Red
GPS_lpps+ 47T Brown
GPS_lpps– 47R Bk/Brn
Phone Line
Telco_Modem_T 48T
Ph
one
Li
ne
Telco_Modem_R 48R
Chasis Ground 49T
Miscellaneo s
Reserved 49R
Mi
sce
ll
aneous
Reserved 50T
Reserved 50R
T1/E1 Span Isolation
Table 3-2 describes the action required for span isolation.
Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation
Step Action
1Have the OMC/CBSC disable the BTS and place it OOS.
2To disable the span lines, use Table 3-1 to locate the pins for the span or spans which must be disabled
and remove the respective surge protector(s).
3
Preparing the LMF
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-10
Overview
Before optimization can be performed, the CDMA LMF must be
installed and configured on a computer platform meeting
Motorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment
and Software in Chapter 1).
For the CDMA LMF graphics to display properly, the
computer platform must be configured to display more
than 256 colors. See the operating system software
instructions for verifying and configuring the display
settings.
IMPORTANT
*
Software and files for installing and updating the CDMA LMF are
provided on CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:
SCDMA LMF Program on CD ROM
SCDMA LMF Binaries on CD ROM
SConfiguration Data File (CDF) for each supported BTS (on floppy
disk)
SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk)
The following section provides information and instructions for
installing and updating CDMA LMF software and files.
LMF Installation and Update Procedures
First Time Installation Sequence:
SInstall Java Runtime Environment (JRE) (First)
SInstall U/WIN K–shell emulator (Second)
SInstall LMF software (Third)
SInstall BTS Binaries (Fourth)
SInstall/create BTS folders (Fifth)
NOTE
Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to:
1. Install the CDMA LMF program using the CDMA LMF CD ROM
2. Install binary files using the CDMA LMF CD ROM
Table 3-3: CD ROM Installation
nStep Action
1Insert the CDMA LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive.
SIf the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
SIf the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.
2Click on the Start button
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-3: CD ROM Installation
nActionStep
3 Select Run.
4 Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.
NOTE
(If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.)
5Follow the directions displayed in the Setup screen.
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the
LMF Computer
Before logging on to a BTS with the CDMA LMF computer to execute
optimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and
cbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a
bts-# folder in the CDMA LMF computer. This requires creating
versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy diskette
and using the diskette to install the CDF files on the CDMA LMF
computer.
When copying CDF files, comply with the following to
prevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF:
SThe numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and
cbsc-#.cdf filenames must correspond to the
locally–assigned numbers for each BTS and its
controlling CBSC.
SThe generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the Windows
LMF will work with locally numbered BTS CDF files.
Using this file will not provide a valid optimization
unless the generic file is edited to replace default
parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the operational
parameters used locally.
IMPORTANT
*
The procedure in Table 3-4 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF
files from the CBSC to the CDMA LMF computer. For any further
information, refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part
no. 68P64114A21) or the CDMA LMF Help screen.
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer
Step Action
1Login to the CBSC workstation.
2Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.
3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.
. . . continued on next page
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-12
Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer
Step Action
4 Type mount and press the Enter key.
NOTE
SLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.
SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.
5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname>
(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.
6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.
7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files on
the diskette by entering the following command:
unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>
(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).
NOTE
SOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use
the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows text
editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the
CDMA LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.
SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the
command string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).
8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# which must be supported by the CDMA LMF computer.
9When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.
10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.
11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the CDMA LMF computer.
12 Insert the diskette containing the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files into the CDMA LMF computer.
13 Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the wlmf\cdma directory for each
bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.
14 Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the cbsc–#.cdf and bts–#.cdf files from the diskette to the
corresponding wlmf\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13.
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Creating a Named
HyperTerminal Connection for
MMI Communication
Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field
Replaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communication
session between the CDMA LMF computer and the FRU. Using features
of the Windows operating system, the connection properties for an MMI
session can be saved on the CDMA LMF computer as a named Windows
HyperTerminal connection. This eliminates the need for setting up
connection parameters each time an MMI session is required to support
optimization.
Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on
the Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start the
connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminal
connection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.
Table 3-5: Create HyperTerminal Connection
Step Action
1From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs > Accessories
2 Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on the
Hypertrm.exe icon in the window which opens.
NOTE
SIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on the
Close button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)
SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.
3When the Connection Description box opens:
– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,
– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and
– Click OK.
NOTE
For CDMA LMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test
equipment and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to prevent
conflicts.
4From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select Direct to Com 1 or Direct
to Com 2 for the RS–232 connection port, and click OK.
. . . continued on next page
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-14
Table 3-5: Create HyperTerminal Connection
Step Action
5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port
settings as follows:
SBits per second: 9600
SData bits: 8
SParity: None
SStop bits: 1
SFlow control: None
6 Click OK.
7Save the defined connection by selecting:
File > Save
8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File > Exit
9Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.
10 If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open, proceed to step 12.
11 Select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12 Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.
13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
14 From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
16 Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:
File > Close
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-15
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Folder Structure Overview
The CDMA LMF uses a wlmf folder that contains all of the essential
data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following list outlines
the folder structure for CDMA LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders,
these folders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation.
Figure 3-3: CDMA LMF Folder Structure
version folder (A separate folder is
required for each different version; for
example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)
loads
folder
(C:)
wlmf
folder
cdma
folder
code
folder
data
folder
BTS–nnn
folders (A separate folder is
required for each BTS where bts–nnn is the
unique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)
wlmf
Folder
The wlmf folder contains the CDMA LMF program files.
cdma
Folder
The cdma folder contains the bts–nnn folders and the loads folder. It also
contains a default cbsc–1.cdf file that can be copied to a bts–nnn folder
for use, if one cannot be obtained from the CBSC (Centralized Base
Station Controller) when needed.
bts–nnn Folders
Each bts–nnn folder contains a CAL file, a CDF file and a cbsc file for
the BTS. Other files required by CDMA LMF may also be located in the
bts–nnn folder. A bts–nnn folder must be created for each BTS that is to
be logged in to. The bts–nnn folder must be correctly named (for
example: bts–273) and must be placed in the cdma folder. Figure 3-4
shows an example of the file naming syntax for a BTS folder.
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-16
Figure 3-4: BTS Folder Name Syntax Example
bts–259
BTS Number
bts–nnn.cal
File
The CAL (Calibration) file contains the bay level offset data (BLO) that
is used for BLO downloads to the BBX devices. The CAL file is
automatically created and updated by the CDMA LMF when TX
calibration is performed. Figure 3-5 details the file name syntax for the
CAL file.
Figure 3-5: CAL File Name Syntax Example
bts–259.cal
BTS Number
bts–nnn.cdf
File
The CDF file contains data that defines the BTS and data that is used to
download data to the devices. A CDF file must be placed in the
applicable BTS folder before the CDMA LMF can be used to log into
that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a
floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the
CDMA LMF computer has that capability. Figure 3-6 details the file
name syntax for the CDF file.
Figure 3-6: CDF Name Syntax Example
bts–259.cdf
BTS Number
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-17
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
cbsc
File
The cbsc–#.cdf (Centralized Base Station Controller) file contains data
for the BTS. If one is not obtained from the CBSC, a copy of the default
cbsc–1.cdf file located in the cdma folder can be used.
Using the generic cbsc–1.cdf file will not provide a valid
optimization unless the generic file is edited to replace
default parameters with local operational parameters (e.g.,
CDMA channel numbers must be changed from the default
“384” to those used locally by the BTS).
IMPORTANT
*
loads
Folder
The loads folder contains the version folder(s). It does not contain any
files.
version
Folder
The version folder(s) contains the code and data folders. It does not
contain any files. The name of version folders is the software version
number of the code files that are included in its code folder. Version
folders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation and CDMA
LMF updates. Each time the CDMA LMF is updated, another version
folder will be created with the number of the software version for the
code files being installed.
code
Folder
The code folder contains the binary files used to load code into the
devices. A unique binary code file is required for each device type in the
BTS to be supported with the CDMA LMF. Current version code files
for each supported device created in this folder from the CDMA LMF
CD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation/update process.
Figure 3-7 shows an example of the file naming syntax for a code load
file.
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-18
Figure 3-7: Code Load File Name Syntax Example
bbx_ram.bin.0600
Device Type Hardware bin number
If this number matches
the bin number of the
device, the code file will
automatically be used
for the download*
GLI=0100
LCI=0300
MCC=0C00
BBX=0600
BDC=0700
CSM=0800
TSU=0900
LPAC=0B00
MAWI=0D00
The device bin number can be determined by using the Status
function after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have a
bin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.
*
If a code file with the correct version and bin numbers is not found, a file
selection window will appear.
data Folder
The data folder contains a DDS (Device Definition Structure) data file
for each supported device type. The DDS files are used to specify the
CDF file data that is used to download data to a device. Current version
DDS files for each supported device type are created in this folder from
the CDMA LMF CD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation or
update process. Figure 3-8 shows an example of the file naming syntax
for a code load file.
3
Preparing the LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-19
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Figure 3-8: DDS File Name Syntax Example
csm.dds.0800
Device Type Device Bin Type Number
If this number matches the bin
number of the device, the DDS file
will automatically be used for the
download*
GLI=0100
LCI=0300
MCC=0C00
BBX=0600
BDC=0700
CSM=0800
TSU=0900
LPAC=0B00
The device bin number can be determined by using the Status
function after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have a
bin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.
*
3
LMF to BTS Connection
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-20
LMF to BTS Connection
The CDMA LMF computer is connected to the LAN A or B connector
located behind the frame lower air intake grill. Figure 3-9 below shows
the general location of these connectors.
Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS
Step Action
1To gain access to the LAN connectors, open the LAN cable and utility shelf access panel, then pull
apart the hook–and–loop tape covering the BNC “T” connector. If desired, slide out the utility shelf
for the LMF computer.
2Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet
Adapter.
NOTE
Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the CDMA LMF Ethernet
connection to the BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC
transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed three feet in length.
* IMPORTANT
The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)
must not touch the chassis during optimization.
LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS
ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME
(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;
ETHERNET “B” COVERED
WITH VELCRO TAPE)
LMF COMPUTER
TERMINAL WITH
MOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNET
ADPATER & ETHERNET
UTP ADAPTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11
CONNECTORS)
10BASET/10BASE2
CONVERTER
CONNECTS
DIRECTLY TO BNC T
115 VAC POWER
CONNECTION
NOTE:
Open LAN CABLE ACCESS
door. Pull apart Velcro tape and
gain access to the LAN A or LAN
B LMF BNC connector.
Figure 3-9: LMF Connection Detail
SC4812ETL0012–1
3
Using CDMA LMF
08/15/2000 3-21
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Basic CDMA LMF Operation
The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating
environments which are accessed using the specified desktop icons:
SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
SCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic operation of the CDMA LMF in either environment includes
performing the following:
SSelecting and Deselecting BTS devices
SEnabling devices
SDisabling devices
SResetting devices
SObtaining device status
The following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUI
environment:
SSorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other CDMA LMF
operations, refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide – 68P64114A21.
Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manual
are performed using the GUI environment.
IMPORTANT
*
Logging Into a BTS
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file is
used for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are
provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the
correct CDF files can result in invalid optimization.
Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live
(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.
WARNING
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTSs at a
time, but only one CDMA LMF may be logged into each BTS.
Before attempting to start the CDMA LMF computer and the CDMA
LMF software, confirm the CDMA LMF computer is properly connected
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-22
to the BTS (see Table 3-6). Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log
into a BTS.
Prerequisites
Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
SThe CDMA LMF is correctly installed and prepared.
SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC files exists.
SThe CDMA LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting
the Windows operating system and the CDMA LMF software. If
necessary, restart the computer after connecting it to the BTS in
accordance with Table 3-6 and NO TAG.
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
nStep Action
1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the
LMF is not running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes No
2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).
3Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).
4Click on the desired BTS number.
5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
8Change the Multi-Channel Preselector from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list (normally
MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
9Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.
. . . continued on next page
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-23
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
nActionStep
10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)
NOTE
SIf you attempt to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
SIf the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devices
can be seen.
SIf the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be
seen.
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-24
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedures in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the
same time, the GUI must be started first and BTS login
must be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-7 to
start the GUI environment and log into a BTS.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure
nStep Action
1Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already
running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI environment was started, the CLI
session will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts–
<bts#> <host> <port>
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this
is first login to this BTS)
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login
to this BTS)
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=login bts–33
13:08:18.882 Command In Progress
13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
Logging Out Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLI
operating environments.
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-25
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and CLI
environments at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When the
logout is performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI
indication that logout has occurred.
IMPORTANT
*
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
nStep Action
1Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.
2Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).
3Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login tab will appear.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as
the GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system could not log out of the
BTS. When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further
operations.
4If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base
Station because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.
5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click
Yes in the Logout Error popup which appears again.
6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
NOTE
SThe Select menu on the BTS tab will only log you out of the displayed BTS.
SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection
in the menu bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up
message will appear.
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-26
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
nStep Action
* IMPORTANT
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
1Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts–
<bts#>
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=logout bts–33
13:24:51.028 Command In Progress
13:24:52.04 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
Establishing an MMI
Communication Session
For those procedures which require MMI communication between the
CDMA LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedures in Table 3-11 to
initiate the communication session.
Figure 3-10 illustrates common equipment connections for the CDMA
LMF computer. For specific connection locations on FRUs, refer to the
illustration accompanying the procedures which require the MMI
communication session.
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication
Step Action
1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure which
requires the MMI communication session.
2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows
desktop shortcut.
. . . continued on next page
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
08/15/2000 3-27
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication
Step Action
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from
the Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminal
Connection (e.g., MMI Session)>
3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing
the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is
obtained.
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE (P/N
30–09786R01)
RS–232 CABLE
8–PIN
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
To FRU MMI port
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
Figure 3-10: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections
COM1
OR
COM2
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in CDMA LMF by clicking on
Help in the menu bar.
3
Pinging the Processors
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-28
Pinging the BTS
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be be verified. NO TAG represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.
Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN network
modules to get a response from the specified “target” module.
Follow the steps in Table 3-12 to ping each processor (on both LAN A
and LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD.
CAUTION
Block
50 Pair
RGD/RGPS
A
B
IN OUT
LAN
Spans
Alarms
Modem
Spans)
Punch
(Alarms/
RFGPS
Block
50 Pair
RGD/RGPS
A
B
IN OUT
LAN
Spans
Alarms
Modem
Spans)
CHASSIS
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
50Ω
IN
SC4812ETL
(MASTER)
OUT
SC4812ETL
(EXPANSION)
CHASSIS
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
SIGNAL
GROUND
50Ω
Figure 3-11: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram
Punch
(Alarms/
RFGPS
50Ω
50Ω
SC4812ETL0013–1
3
Map Title Goes Here – continued
08/15/2000 3-29
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
*The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on
each frame/enclosure before performing this test. All other
processor board LAN connections are made via the
backplanes.
IMPORTANT
Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors
Step Action
1From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
2In the Open box, type ping and the GLI2 IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI2 in field BTS units.
3Click on the OK button.
4If the targeted module responds, text similar to the following is displayed:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
If there is no response the following is displayed:
Request timed out
If the GLI2 fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typical
problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, or the
GLI2 itself.
3
Download the BTS
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-30
Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data
must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS
can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the CDMA LMF is NOT
routine maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is
only done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the
device does not match the release level of the site operating software
AND the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to perform the
download. An example would be a BTS loaded with Release 9.2
software where a GLI loaded with Release 2.8.1 ROM code must be
installed to replace a malfunctioning MGLI.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
ROM code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF
computer. ROM code must be manually selected for download.
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded will change to
OOS–ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS–ROM (blue) when the
download is completed. The same Revision–level RAM code must then
be downloaded to the device. For example, if Release 2.9.2.1.1 ROM
code is downloaded, Release 2.9.2.1.1 RAM code must be downloaded.
Procedures to load ROM code are located in Appendix G.
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM
code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selected
automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder
(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code that matches
the “NextLoad” parameter of the CDF file). The RAM code file in the
code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS-ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device will
change to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI
or GLI, the CDMA LMF automatically also downloads data and then
enables the MGLI. When enabled, the MGLI will change to INS (green).
For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM
(yellow).
3
Download the BTS – continued
08/15/2000 3-31
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:
SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI2)
SRedundant GLI (GLI2)
SClock Syncronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code must
be loaded)
SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC24) card
SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2)
SRFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC), if equipped
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM
code and data, and in INS (green) status before
downloading any other device. The RAM code download
process for an MGLI automatically downloads data and
then enables the MGLI.
IMPORTANT
*
RAM code downloading requires a few minutes. After the download
starts, the non–GLI device being loaded changes to OOS–ROM (blue). If
the download is completed successfully, the non–GLI device changes to
OOS–RAM (yellow).
3
Download the BTS – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-32
Download RAM Code and Data
to MGLI and GLI Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to download the RAM code and
data to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.
Release 2.9.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a
device loaded with Release 2.8.x ROM code, and Release
2.8.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a device
loaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code.
All devices in a BTS must have the same Release–level
ROM and RAM code before the optimization and ATP
procedures can be performed.
If a newly–installed Release 8–equipped BTS is to be
upgraded to Release 2.9.x, the optimization and
Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) should be accomplished
with the Release 2.8.x code and software. Following the
optimization, the site code and software should be
upgraded to Release 2.9.x by the CBSC. It is not necessary
to perform the optimization and ATPs again after the
upgrade.
If a replacement device with Release 2.8.x ROM code
must be used in a Release 2.9.x–equipped BTS, the device
ROM code can be changed using the CDMA LMF before
the performing the BTS optimization and ATPs. A device
loaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code can not be converted
back to Release 2.8.x ROM code in the field without
Motorola assistance.
CAUTION
Prerequisites
SPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for each
of the devices to be loaded.
SThe CDMA LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to
Table 3-6), and is logged in using the GUI environment (refer to
Table 3-7).
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices
Step Action
1From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.
2Select the correct code version and click Save.
3Download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.
4From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the status
window. (The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.)
. . . continued on next page
3
Download the BTS – continued
08/15/2000 3-33
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices
Step Action
5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices and
repeating step 4.
6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices.
Download RAM Code and Data
to Non–GLI Devices
Downloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for each
device or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAM
code and data are downloaded to non–GLI devices in separate steps.
CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAM
code is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer software
version needs to be loaded.
IMPORTANT
*
When downloading to multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). These
devices can be loaded individually after completing the
multiple download.
NOTE
Follow the steps in Table 3-14 to download RAM code and data to
non–GLI devices.
Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices
Step Action
1Select the target CSM, BDC, MCC, BBX, and ELPA Gateway device(s).
2From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.
3 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
NOTE
After a BBX, CSM, MCC, or ELPA Gateway device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has
changed to the OOS–RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
4To download data, select the target CSM, BDC, MCC, BBX, and ELPA Gateway device(s).
5From the Device pull down menu, select Download Data.
A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.
6 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.
3
Download the BTS – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-34
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options.
SLocal GPS
SRemote GPS
SHSO (only for source 2 & 3)
SLFR (only for source 2 & 3)
S10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)
SNONE (only for source 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT (green), CSM= OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT
(green)
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source
Step Action
1Select the applicable CSM(s).
2Click on the Device menu.
3Click on the Clock Source menu item.
4Click on the Select menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.
5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the related
check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
6Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selection
action.
7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).
The GPS receiver interfaced to CSM 1 is used as the primary timing
reference and synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides
clock syncronization redundancy, but does not have a GPS receiver.
The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver
(LFR) High Stability Oscillator (HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidium
source which the CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all
cases, the CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a given
time.
3
Download the BTS – continued
08/15/2000 3-35
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS
receiver “daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1
slot before continuing.
IMPORTANT
*
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs
Step Action
1Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status report window.
NOTE
FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in the
Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.
CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).
* IMPORTANT
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operated
by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters satellite orbits;
therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”
that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPS
receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position fix
for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiver
needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).
2NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, CSM–1 should be bright green (INS–ACT) and CSM–2 should be dark
green(INS–STB)
If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-12 and Table 3-19 to
determine the cause.
NOTE
After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green
(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”
parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
3
Download the BTS – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-36
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 mS).
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs installed in
the SCCP shelves.
The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled,
prior to downloading and enabling the MCC.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs
Step Action
1Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose All MCCs.
2From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.
3 Click OK to close the status report window.
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification
08/15/2000 3-37
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Clock Synchronization
Manager (CSM) System Time
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in
slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy.
The CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the
remote GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the
antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have
a daughter card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.
The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1
and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution Cards
(CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608 MHz
clocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to CSM 2. A
failure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to redundant
CSM 2 and CCD 2.
Each CSM2 board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides
19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referenced to the
selected synchronization source (see Table 3-19):
SGPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/R–GPS
SLORAN–C Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability Oscillator
(HSO)
SExternal reference oscillator sources
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1
board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The source
selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.
Synchronization between the primary and redundant CSM CCD pairs, as
well as the LFR or HSO back–up to GPS synchronization, increases
reliability.
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator
The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-38
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has
an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame
and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and
LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-19).
HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(see Table 3-19).
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for
60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power.
CSM board warm-up allows the oscillator oven
temperature and oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to
test. Test equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium
standard timebase to stabilize in frequency before any
measurements are made.
NOTE
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
08/15/2000 3-39
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the Clock
Synchronization Module (CSM) boards before performing the rf path
verification tests. Parts of this procedure will be repeated for final
verification after the overall optimization has been completed.
Test Equipment Setup
(GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step Action
1a For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM slot 1
and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.
1b For Remote GPS (RGPS):Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC (or subsequent).
2Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
board) to the MMI port on CSM–1 (see Figure 3-12).
3Reinstall CSM–2.
4Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
NO TAG)
NOTE
The LMF program must be running when a Hyperterminal session is started.
5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.
SConnect GPS antenna to the (GPS) RF connector
ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver
can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected
to any other RF connector.
CAUTION
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-40
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
COM1
LMF
NOTEBOOK
Figure 3-12: CSM MMI Terminal Connection
FW00372
CSM board shown
removed from frame
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
GPS RECEIVER
MMI SERIAL
PORT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to connect to CSM–1 installed in
the SCCP shelf, verifying that it is functioning normally.
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
08/15/2000 3-41
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step Action
1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.
BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
2Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the
GPS receivers.
sources
– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:
N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes
1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes
2 Not Used
Current reference source number: 0
– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes
1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed–out* Timed–out* No
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid
source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes
1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-42
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step Action
3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage
4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
08/15/2000 3-43
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step Action
5Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
24:06:08
24:06:08 Recent Change Data:
24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
24:06:08
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:
24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
(GPS)
24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.
24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.
24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
24:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:
24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8
24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8
24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115
24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _
24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769
24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB
24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
6Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-44
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step Action
7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
8Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
9Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175
10 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
11 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
08/15/2000 3-45
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
LORAN–C
Initialization/Verification
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step Action Note
1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
mode
.
A
typical
response
is:
CSM> lstatus <cr>
LFR St ti St t
LFR Station Status:
Clock coherence: 512 >
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:
5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:
5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Fl
This must be greater
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >
7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:
7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag
This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Fl
ag:
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Fl
g
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Fla
g
:E
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E
9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E
9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:
9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S
9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E
9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E
9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Fl
ag:
9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-46
Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification
Step NoteAction
2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
– Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes
1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes
2 Not used
Current reference source number: 1
4LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
5Close the hyperterminal window.
3
Test Equipment Setup
08/15/2000 3-47
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Connecting Test Equipment to
the BTS
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via IEEE–488/GPIB bus.
The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory set
GPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMF
and any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have
been set correctly (normally 13 for a power meter and 18 for a CDMA
analyzer).
The following test equipment is required to perform optimization,
calibration and ATP tests:
SLMF
STest set
SDirectional coupler and attenuator
SRF cables and connectors
Refer to Table 3-21 for an overview of connections for test equipment
currently supported by LMF. In addition, see the following figures:
SFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the test set connections for TX
calibration
SFigure 3-16 and Figure 3-17 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests
Supported Test Sets
Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of the
following test sets:
SCyberTest
SAdvantest R3465 and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
SHewlett–Packard HP 8935
SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface (1.9 GHz)
and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional
SRubidium Standard Timebase – optional
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX)
test connections must be through the 30 dB directional
coupler for an 800 MHz BTS and the 30dB directional
coupler plus a 20dB in-line attenuator for a 1.9 GHz BTS.
CAUTION
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-48
Test Equipment Setup Chart
Table 3-21 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorola
standards.
To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently
being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.
Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to
that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),
reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.
Table 3-21: Test Equipment Setup
TEST SETS ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
SIGNAL Cyber–
Test Ad-
vantest HP
8935 HP
8921A
HP
8921
W/PCS Power
Meter
GPIB
Inter-
face LMF Directional
Coupler & Pad* BTS
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION EVEN
SEC REF EVEN SEC
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN EXT
REF IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS IEEE
488 GPIB HP–IB HP–IB GPIB SERIAL
PORT
HP–IB HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES RF
IN/OUT INPUT
50–OHM RF
IN/OUT TX1–6
RF
IN/OUT RF
IN/OUT 20 DB
PAD BTS
PORT
RX TEST
CABLES RF IN/
OUT RF OUT
50–OHM DUPLEX RX1–12
DUPLEX
OUT RF OUT
ONLY
SYNC
MONITOR
FREQ
MONITOR
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
08/15/2000 3-49
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Equipment Warm-up
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
IMPORTANT
*
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX
channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC
place the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under test
OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Cable Calibration Setup
Figure 3-13 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported test
sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and
output ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for each
test. Table 3-25 provides a procedure for calibrating cables.
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-50
Motorola CyberTest
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
Advantest Model R3465
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
50–OHM
INPUT
50–OHM
RF GEN OUTANT IN
ANT
IN
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TEST
SET
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
SHORT
CABLE
B. RX TEST SETUP
TEST
SET
C. TX TEST SETUP
20 DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
CALIBRATION SET UP
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TX
CABLE
TX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
TEST
SET
RX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
Figure 3-13: Cable Calibration Test Setup
FW00089
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
08/15/2000 3-51
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Setup for TX Calibration
Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Motorola CyberTest
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
FRONT PANEL RF
IN/OUT
RF IN/OUT
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
OUT
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
ON
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
BTS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH
SETTINGS**
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
TX TEST
CABLE
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
POWER
SENSOR
Figure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935)
FW00094
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
** BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-52
POWER METER
TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH
SETTINGS*
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
TX ANTENNA GROUP
OR TX RFDS DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
TX
TEST
CABLE
POWER
SENSOR
FW00095
NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST
CANNOT
BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. A
POWER METER MUST BE USED.
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
08/15/2000 3-53
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-16 and Figure 3-17 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
Motorola CyberTest
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF
IN/OUT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RF IN/OUT
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
Advantest Model R3465
INPUT
50–OHM
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used
with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.
RF OUT
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
OUT
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
FW00096
Figure 3-16: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RF
OUT
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-54
RF OUT
ONLY
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIPSWITCH SETTINGS*
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
OUT
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
2O DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
RF
IN/OUT
Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A
REF FW00097
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
* FOR 1700 AND
1900 MHZ ONLY
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF
IN/OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
* BLACK PORTION OF THE
DIAGRAM REPRESENTS THE
RAISED PART OF THE
SWITCH
3
Test Set Calibration
PRELIMINARY
08/15/2000 3-55
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Background
Proper test equipment setup ensures that the test equipment and
associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that
measurements are correct.
If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been
calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not
need to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,
communications test set, additional test equipment,
associated test cables, and adapters.)
NOTE
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and
adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has
been calibrated and maintained as a set.
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,
that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been
replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
can introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
CAUTION
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
IMPORTANT
*
Purpose
These procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routine
used to determine the path losses of the supported communications
analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna
switch that make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the
gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the
CDMA LMF.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-56
Selecting Test Equipment
Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
Prerequisites
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMF
computer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab
is used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a
network connection.
Ensure the following has been completed before selecting test
equipment:
STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Manually Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification.
Table 3-22: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
Step Action
1From the Options menu, select LMF Options. The LMF Options window appears.
2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box. Recommended Addresses
13=Power Meter
18=CDMA Analyzer
7Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.)
NOTE
With manual selection, CDMA LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with CDMA LMF.
8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
08/15/2000 3-57
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Automatically Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the
CDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actually
communicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-23
to use the auto-detect feature.
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
Step Action
1From the Options menu, select LMF Options. The LMF Options window appears.
2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
4Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).
5Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
NOTE
When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to
search box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a power
meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in the
GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will be used for RF power measurements. If the
test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter is not
selected.
6 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will
appear in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-58
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power
meter is zeroed.
Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibrate
test equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipment
must be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-24 to calibrate the test equipment.
Table 3-24: Test Equipment Calibration
Step Action
1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Follow
the instructions provided.
2Follow the direction provided.
3Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.
4Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables
The cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for the
TX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is
used to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable
configuration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibration
consists of the following steps.
SMeasure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for any
measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used only
for the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of the
short cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX
cable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX
cable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in the
analyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements.
SThe short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured. The
RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable with
type–N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX port
the test equipment.
SThe short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured. The
TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type–N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of the path loss
of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is different
in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set so the TX
cable configuration consists only of the required length coax cable.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
08/15/2000 3-59
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Calibrating Cables with a
CDMA Analyzer
The Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used to
calibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.
LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with an
HP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer type
or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method must
be used (refer to Table 3-26 and Table 3-27). Cable
calibration values must be manually entered if the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer method is used. For the
HP8921A, refer to Appendix F.
NOTE
The test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-13
illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup.
Table 3-25: Cable Calibration
Step Action
1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a
comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will be
calibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TX
calibration.
3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibration
picklist.
4 Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayed
with the results of the cable calibration.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-60
Calibrating TX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and Spectrum
Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the TX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-18 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-26: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step Action
1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 1840–1870 MHz band for Korea PCS and
1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.
3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-18, “A”) and record the value.
4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of the
diagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (1840–1870 MHz for Korea PCS and
1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.
5Calibration factor = A – B Example: Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures use
the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
50 OHM
TERMINATION
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
Spectrum
Analyzer
Signal
Generator
A
Spectrum
Analyzer
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
B
SHORT TEST CABLE
Signal
Generator
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE
POWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATION
AND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TX
ATP TESTS.
SHORT
TEST
CABLE THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION
TO THE TX PORTS DURING TX
CALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX
PORTS DURING ATP TESTS.
SECOND RF
TEST CABLE.
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
FW00293
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
08/15/2000 3-61
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Calibrating RX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and Spectrum
Analyzer Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-19, if required.
Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
Step Action
1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.
2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS
and 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.
3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-19, “A”) and record the value
for “A”.
4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency in the 1850–1910 MHz band. Record the value at point ‘‘B”.
5Calibration factor = A – B
Example: Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dB
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final test
setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to
ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Spectrum
Analyzer
Signal
Generator
A
B
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
SHORT TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE OUTPUT
PORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTS
Signal
Generator
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW00294
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-62
Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing cable calibration with use of the
applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable
loss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.
Prerequisites
SLogged into the BTS
Table 3-28: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit >Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
3Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
08/15/2000 3-63
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value If an in–service TX coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)
must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX
calibration and audit calculations.
Prerequisites
SLogged into the BTS
Table 3-29: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit >TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
SThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Options>LMF Options>BTS Options tab must
checked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit
functions.
SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-64
Introduction
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset
Calibration
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path
(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. The
BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX2.
Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and terminates at a
backplane BBX2 slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX2 backplane
slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path
(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Each
transmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX2 slot, travels
through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path
calibration is performed, the RX path BLO will automatically be set to
the default value.
When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.
The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated once
each year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for all
associated RF paths after replacing any of the following components or
associated interconnecting RF cabling:
SBBX2 board
SSCCP shelf
SCIO card
SCIO to LPA backplane RF cable
SLPA backplane
SLPA
STX filter / TX filter combiner
STX thru-port cable to the RF Interface Panel
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-65
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector you must first verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector
assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,
there is a high probability that the card/module could be
damaged by ESD.
CAUTION
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of
each SCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated
with BBX2 boards), move BBX2 boards from shelves
currently not under test and install them into the empty
BBX2 slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that
all BBX2 TX paths are tested.
– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites
that are due for periodic optimization.
– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the
correct BBX2 slots are equipped. Edit the file as
required to include BBX2 slots not currently
equipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).
IMPORTANT
*
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-66
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (BLO) data
file. After calibration has been completed, this offset data must be
downloaded to the BBX2s using the Download BLO function. An
explanation of the file is shown below.
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you
print out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the
following descriptions.
NOTE
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a
slot Block).
Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX2 slots. Slot 20
contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX2 (see Table 3-31).
Each BBX2 slot header block contains:
SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
SThe number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and
actual calibration data.
SThe calibration data for a BBX2 is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, BBX2 slot, and calibration point.
– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the
contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main
receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-30: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments
Range Assignment
C[1]–C[120] Transmit
C[121]–C[240] Receive
C[241]–C[360] Diversity Receive
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-67
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Three sectors are
allowed.
Table 3-31: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX2 Sectorization TX RX RX Diversity
Slot[1] (Primary BBX2s 1 through 12)
1 (Omni)
3S t
C[1]–C[20] C[121]–C[140] C[241]–C[260]
23–Sector,
1st Carrier
C[21]–C[40] C[141]–C[160] C[261]–C[280]
3
1st
Carrier
C[41]–C[60] C[161]–C[180] C[281]–C[300]
4
3S t
C[61]–C[80] C[181]–C[200] C[301]–C[320]
53–Sector,
2nd Carrier
C[81]–C[100] C[201]–C[220] C[321]–C[340]
6
2nd
Carrier
C[101]–C[120] C[221]–C[240] C[341]–C[360]
Slot[20] (Redundant BBX2–R1)
1 (Omni)
3S t
C[1]–C[20] C[121]–C[140] C[241]–C[260]
23–Sector,
1st Carrier
C[21]–C[40] C[141]–C[160] C[261]–C[280]
3
1st
Carrier
C[41]–C[60] C[161]–C[180] C[281]–C[300]
4
3S t
C[61]–C[80] C[181]–C[200] C[301]–C[320]
53–Sector,
2nd Carrier
C[81]–C[100] C[201]–C[220] C[321]–C[340]
6
2nd
Carrier
C[101]–C[120] C[221]–C[240] C[341]–C[360]
SRefer to the hard copy of the file. As you can see, 10 calibration
points per sector are supported for each branch. Two entries are
required for each calibration point.
SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel
(frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all even
entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from
2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500
corresponds to +125 dBm).
SThe 20 calibration entries for each slot/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is
repeated to fill out the 10 points.
Example:
C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”
C[2]=19102, even cal entry
C[3]=777,
C[4]=19086,
.
.
C[19]=777,
C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this
would be repeated for the next 8 points)
SWhen the BBX2 is loaded with BLO data, the cal file data for the
BBX2 is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-68
file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[60]. BBX2 slot 1’s 10
calibration points are sent (C[1] – C[20]), followed by BBX2 slot 2’s
10 calibration points (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next,
followed by the RxDCal data.
STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
slot.
Test Equipment Setup:
RF Path Calibration
Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-32 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-32: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)
Step Action
NOTE
Verify the GPIB is properly connected and turned on.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900 MHz.
1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not
already done so). Refer to the procedure in NO TAG.
SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-24.
SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15.
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration is derived from the site CDF file.
For each BBX2, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList
CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX2 (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB
of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
+1.5 dB.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler
option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.
SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately
42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power
measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX2 TX output level
(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,
is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output
minus BBX2 output level.
SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler
(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-69
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately
–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.
The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,
perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit
menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX
audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through
the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
SCSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBX2s have correct code load and data
load.
SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.
SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15
and follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to perform the TX calibration
test.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Verify all BBX2 boards removed and repositioned have
been returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX2
boards moved since they were downloaded will have to be
downloaded again.
IMPORTANT
*
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-70
Table 3-33: BTS TX Path Calibration
Step Action
1Select the BBX2(s) to be calibrated.
2From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.
3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.
4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
5Click on OK.
6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
The test results will be displayed in the status report window.
7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset
(BLO) calibration file data to the BBX2s. BLO data is extracted from the
CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to
the selected BBX2 devices.
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
NOTE
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.
SBBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
STX calibration successfully completed
Follow the steps in Table 3-34 to download the BLO data to the BBX2s.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-71
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-34: Download BLO
Step Action
1Select the BBX2(s) to be downloaded.
2From the Device menu, select Download BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
3 Click OK to close the status report window.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-72
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit procedure
measures the path gain or loss of every BBX2 transmit path at the site.
In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success or
failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.
*RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data
download to BBX2s must have been successfully
completed prior to performing the calibration audit.
IMPORTANT
Transmit (TX) Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX2
slots, per the steps in Table 3-35.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
NOTE
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-73
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX2(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
SCSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code load.
SPrimary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.
STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
Table 3-35: TX Path Audit
Step Action
1Select the BBX2(s) to be audited. From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.
2Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.
3Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
4Click on OK.
5Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
6Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-74
All Cal/Audit Test
The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration
and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the
appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
If the TX calibration portion of the test passed, the BLO
data will automatically be downloaded to the BBX2(s)
before the audit portion of the test is run.
NOTE
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
SCSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code and data load.
SPrimary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.
STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedures in Table 3-36 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Table 3-36: All Cal/Audit Test
Step Action
1Select the BBX2(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
2Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.
3Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
4Click on OK.
5Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
6Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-75
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can
be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
will exist. Note the following:
SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can
cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF.
To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of the
BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use the
Create Cal File function the edited information will be lost.
WARNING
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
SLMF is logged in to the BTS
SBBX2s are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded
Table 3-37: Create CAL File
Step Action
1Select the applicable BBX2s. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBX2s.
2Click on the Device menu.
3Click on the Create Cal File menu item. The status report window is displays the results of the action.
4 Click OK.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-76
RFDS Description
The optional RFDS is a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) used to perform
RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS
contains the following elements:
SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)
SFWT Interface Card (FWTIC)
SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA
RFDS Hardware Installation manual (Motorola part no. 6864113A93)
CDMA RFDS User’s Guide (Motorola part no. 6864113A37), and the
CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part no. 6864113A21).
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must
match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the
editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-38 explains how to edit
the parameter settings.
SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
STsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
SMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(9600 system RFDS only)
SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
STestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file
to verify, view, or modify data.
NOTE
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-77
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-38: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file (1 = GLI based
RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).
EXAMPLE:
RfdsEquip = 2
TsuEquip = 1
MC1Equip = 0
MC2Equip = 0
MC3Equip = 0
MC4Equip = 0
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’’
NOTE
The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC and
copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database is
modified for the RFDS.
2Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields data will need to be downloaded
to the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).
3To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window is displayed
showing status of the download. Click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
After downloading data to the GLI2 the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for
approximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED
remains green.
4Status the RFDS TSU. A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC
and SUA.
* IMPORTANT
If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:
SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
SVerify RFDS has power.
SVerify RFDS status LED is green.
SVerify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).
SStatus the GLI2 and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the
device is in the proper state (INS).
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-78
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The NAM (number assignment module) information needs to be
programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or
be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be
programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number
during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be
recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
NOTE
Explanation of Parameters
used when Programming the
TSU NAM
Table 3-39 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-39: Definition of Parameters
Access Overload Code
Slot Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary Channel A
Primary Channel B
Secondary Channel A
Secondary Channel B
These parameters are the channels which are to be used in operation
of the system.
Lock Code
Security Code
Service Level
Station Class Mark
Do NOT change.
IMSI MCC
IMSI 11 12 These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN
and MIN must be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE:
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file.
The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the
TODN is the number the subscriber calls.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-79
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Valid NAM Ranges Table 3-40 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.
Table 3-40: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
NAM Field Name Minimum Maximum
Access Overload Code 0 15
Slot Index 0 7
System ID 0 32767
Network ID 0 32767
Primary Channel A 25 1175
Primary Channel B 25 1175
Secondary Channel A 25 1175
Secondary Channel B 25 1175
Lock Code 0 999
Security Code 0 999999
Service Level 0 7
Station Class Mark 0 255
IMSI 11 12 0 99
IMSI MCC 0 999
MIN Phone Number N/A N/A
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-80
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.
Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an RFDS is not
installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is
required if a RFDS is installed.
Prerequisite
SLogged into the BTS
Table 3-41: Set Antenna Map Data
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit >Antenna Map >TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
3Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.
4Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
5Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-81
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered.
Prerequisite
SLogged into the BTS
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to
the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 3-42: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit >RFDS Configuration >TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.
3Click on the Add Row button to add a new antenna number. Then click in the other columns and enter
the desired data.
4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data
examples.
5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Save
button was used will not be saved.
NOTE
Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and
login.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-82
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX
paths. For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS XCVR is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured
by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna
directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being
used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the
power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna
directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.
For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by the
BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the
BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the
CDMA communications analyzer. The difference (offset) between the
RFDS keyed power level and power level measured at the BTS XCVR is
the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL
file.
For each RFDS TSIC, the channel frequency is determined at the lower
third and upper third of the appropriate band using the frequencies listed
in Table 3-43.
Table 3-43: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies
System Channel Calibration Points
800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 682
1.9 GHz 408 and 791
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Prerequisites
SBBX2s are is INS_TEST
SCable calibration has been performed
STX calibration has been performed and BLO has bee downloaded for
the BTS
STest equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration
STest equipment has been selected and calibrated
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
08/15/2000 3-83
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration
Step Action
1Select the RFDS tab.
2Click on the RFDS menu.
3Click on the RFDS Calibration menu item
4Select the appropriate direction (TX/RX) in the Direction pick list
5Enter the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channels box. Separate the channel numbers with a
comma or a dash if more than one channel number is entered (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 for
through).
6 Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list (use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple
carriers).
7Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the RX Branch pick list.
8Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.
9Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–up
window.
10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. Test results are displayed in the status
report window.
11 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-84
Program TSU NAM
Follow the procedure in Table 3-45 to program the TSU NAM. The
NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,
or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
SMGLI is INS.
STSU is powered up and has a code load.
Table 3-45: Program NAM Procedure
Step Action
1Select the RFDS tab.
2Select the TSU tab.
3Click on the TSU menu.
4Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.
5Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-39 and Table 3-40) .
6Click on the OK button to display the status report.
7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3
Alarms Testing
08/15/2000 3-85
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Alarm Verification
The alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in the
optimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that the
SC4812ETL is generating the appropriate alarms.
The SC 4812ETL is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customer
defined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interface
to the 50–pin punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”
during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering the
alarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from the
active MGLI2.
All customer alarms are routed through the 50 pair punchblock located
in the I/O compartment at the back of the frame. Testing is best
accomplished by using a specialized connector that interfaces to the
50–pair punchblock. This connector is wired so that customer return 1 (2
for the B side) is connected to every input, CDI 0 through CDI 17.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included.
SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and
Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of
alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired
alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the Ctrl key (for
individual selections) or Shift key (for a range of selections) while
clicking on the desired levels.
SThe Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.
When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes to
Continue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarms
will continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is
clicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.
SThe Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.
New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will be
displayed.
SThe Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitor
display.
3
Alarms Testing – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-86
Heat Exchanger Alarm Test
Table 3-46 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.
Table 3-46: Heat Exchanger Alarm
Step Action
1Turn circuit breaker “B” of the Heat Exchanger circuit breakers OFF. This will generate a Heat
Exchanger alarm, ensure that the LMF reports the correct alarm condition.
2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #25 – “Heat Exchanger Alarm” makes contact.
3Turn the circuit breaker “B” ON. Ensure that the alarm condition is now removed.
NOTE
The Heat Exchanger will go through the Start Up sequence.
Door Alarm
Table 3-47 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.
Table 3-47: Door Alarm
Step Action
1Close all doors on the cabinet. Ensure that no alarms are reported on the LMF.
2Individually open and then close each power supply cabinet door. Ensure that the LMF reports an
alarm when each door is opened.
3Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 “Door Alarm” makes contact.
AC Fail Alarm
Table 3-48 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.
Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm
Step Action
1NOTE
The batteries should have a stable charge before performing this test.
Turn the Main AC breaker on the ACLC OFF. The LMF should report an alarm on an AC Fail
(Rectifier Fail, Minor Alarm & Major Alarm) condition.
2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #23, BTS # 21, BTS # 24 and BTS Relay # 29 “AC
Fail Alarm” makes contact respectively.
3Turn the Main AC breaker on the ACLC ON. The AC Fail alarm should clear.
3
Alarms Testing – continued
08/15/2000 3-87
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Minor Alarm
Table 3-49 gives instructions on testing minor alarm.
Table 3-49: Minor Alarm
Step Action
1Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) power switch OFF. This will generate a minor
alarm. Verify that the minor alarm LED (amber) is illuminated on the Meter Alarm Panel and the
LMF reports this minor alarm.
2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #24 “Minor Alarm” makes contact.
3Turn the TCP power switch ON. The alarm condition should clear.
Rectifier Alarms
The following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiple
rectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a six rectifier
system.
Single Rectifier Failure (Three
Rectifier System)
Table 3-50 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system.
Table 3-50: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm
Step Action
1Remove a single rectifier module and place it into the unused rectifier shelf #2.
2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for this 2nd shelf.
3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will illuminate two (2) RED
fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and
rectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions.
NOTE
Alarm conditions reported as BTS #24 and BTS #21, contacts respectively.
5Turn the AC breaker for the 2nd shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and minor alarm conditions
clear on the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF.
Multiple Rectifier Failure
Table 3-51 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a three (3) rectifier system.
3
Alarms Testing – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-88
Table 3-51: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step Action
1With the rectifier module still in the unused shelf position fromTable 3-50 test procedures, turn the
AC breaker for the 1st shelf OFF.
2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will illuminate two (2)
RED fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will indicate a major alarm
(Rectifier Fail and Major Alarm). The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29, BTS #21, and BTS #24)
4Turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.
5Return the rectifier module to its original location. This completes the multiple rectifier alarm test.
Single Rectifier Failure
(Six Rectifier System)
Table 3-52 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minor
alarm in a six (6) rectifier system.
Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm
Step Action
1Remove two(2) rectifier modules from shelf #2.
2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for shelf #2.
3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will illuminate two (2) RED
fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and
rectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
4
Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions (BTS #24 and BTS #21)
4
Ch
ec
k
t
h
at t
h
e
LMF
reports
b
ot
h
o
f
t
h
ese a
l
arm con
di
t
i
ons.
(BTS
#24
an
d
BTS
#21)
5Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and Minor Alarm conditions have
cleared.
Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six
Rectifier System)
Table 3-53 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or major
alarm in a six (6) rectifier system.
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step Action
1Replace one rectifier module previously removed and turn the AC breaker for this shelf, OFF.
2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will illuminate a RED fail
LED, and the Meter Alarm Panel will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail, Major and Minor
Alarm).The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.
. . . continued on next page
3
Alarms Testing – continued
08/15/2000 3-89
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm
Step Action
3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29)
4Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.
5Return all rectifier module to their original location. This completes the rectifier alarm tests.
Battery Over Temperature
Alarm (Optional)
Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, or
damaging battery cases when using a power heat gun.
CAUTION
Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-54: Battery Over Temperature Alarm
Step Action
1Use a low powered heat gun and gently heat the battery over temperature sensor (see location in
Figure 3-20). Do Not hold the hot air gun closer than three (3) inches to the sensor. This will avoid
burning the cable insulation.
2When the sensor is heated to approximately 50° C, a battery Over Temperature alarm is generated.
NOTE
An audible click will sound as K1 contact engage and K2 contacts disengage.
3Visually inspect the K1 and K2 relays to verify state changes. The LMF should be displaying correct
alarms. (BTS #22)
4Verify that the CHARGE DISABLE LED (amber) on the Meter Alarm Panel and the BATTERY
MAIN LED (green) are both illuminated.
5Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contact return to normal position
(K1 open and K2 closed). Use the LMF verify that all alarms have cleared.
3
Alarms Testing – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-90
Figure 3-20: Battery Overtemperature Sensor
Buss Bar
6 AWG Cables
Battery Overtemp Sensor
Negative Temperature Compensation Sensor
SC4812ETL0014–1
3
Alarms Testing – continued
08/15/2000 3-91
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Rectifier Over Temperature
Alarm
This is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself,
this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at the
rear of the cabinet.
NOTE
Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperature
alarm system.
Table 3-55: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm
Step Action
1Remove the J8 link on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel (see Figure 3-21 for J8 location).
NOTE
This is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connector
bulkhead at the rear of the cabinet.
2Verify that RECTIFIER OVERTEMP LED (red) is illuminated. Contacts on K1 and K2 change states
(K1 now closed and K2 open).
3Verify that the LMF has reported an alarm condition. (BTS #26)
4Reinstall J8 connector and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared. K1 and K2 should now be in
their normal states (K1 open and K2 closed).
5This completes the system tests of the SC 4812ETL cabinet.
3
Alarms Testing – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
3-92
Figure 3-21: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel
OFF
VOLT
VOLT
–
+
TEST POINTS
AMPS
–
+
TEST POINTS
AMP
PWR
ON
RED
YEL
BLK
OR
VIOLENT
OR BRWN
Terminal Block
FRONT VIEW
J9
J1
J2
J3 J8 J5
J6 J4
REAR VIEW
Terminal Block
J1 J2
Not
Used
J6
J5 J3
Rear Connector Panel
J4
Before Leaving the site
Table 3-56 gives instructions on what to check before leaving the site.
Table 3-56: Check Before Leaving the Site
Step Action
1Verify that ALL battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are CLOSED (pushed in).
2Verify that the Heat Exchanger is running.
3Verify that the Meter Alarm Panel and TCP modules are switched ON.
4Verify that the Battery Test Switch on the Meter Alarm Panel is in the OFF position.
5Verify that no alarm conditions are being reported (with all doors closed).
3
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Table of Contents
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX/RX OUT Connections 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Test Equipment 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All–inclusive Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX/RX ATP Test 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All TX ATP Test 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX ATP Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Tests 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX FER Acceptance Test 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Acceptance Test 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction
08/15/2000 4-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
The automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the CDMA LMF GUI environment and
supported test equipment.
The operator can choose to save the results of these tests to a report file,
from which ATP reports are generated for later printout.
Perform the ATP test on out-of-service sectors or sites only. Because all
tests are controlled via the CDMA LMF computer using the GPIB
interface from the CDMA LMF computer, only recommended test
equipment supported by the CDMA LMF can be used.
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
IMPORTANT
*
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors
only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the LMF.
IMPORTANT
*
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test
set components, if required.
NOTE
The CFE selects the appropriate ATP tests to run to satisfy customer and
regulatory requirements for verifying cell site performance. These tests
can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit
elements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, BDC, and BIO
modules, the ELPAs and passive components including splitters,
combiners, bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.
SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receive elements.
These include the receive preselector (for starter frames), BIO, BBX,
BDC, MCC, and GLI modules and the passive components including
RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.
SAll TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.
SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.
4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-2
Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, all applicable procedures
outlined in Chapter 3, Optimization/Calibration, must have been
completed successfully (i.e., code load and BLO calibration).
You cannot substitute test equipment with other models not
supported by the CDMA LMF.
NOTE
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:
SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
SLMF is logged into the BTS
SCSMs, GLI2s, BBX2s, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)
have correct code load and data load
SPrimary CSM and GLI2 are INS_ACT
SMCCs are INS_ACT
SBBX2s are OOS-RAM
SBBX2s are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded
STest cables are calibrated
STest equipment is selected
STest equipment is connected for ATP tests
STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated
SGPIB is on
Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned
OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports
are properly terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP
tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
TX/RX OUT Connections
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At
sites with RFDS, all measurements are through the RFDS
directional coupler TX OUT connector.
IMPORTANT
*
4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up
08/15/2000 4-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required:
SLMF
SPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
SCommunications test set
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels
keyed.
At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier
assigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
You must recalibrate the test equipment before using it to
perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
NOTE
Acceptance Test Equipment
Set Up
Follow the steps in Table 4-1 to set up test equipment for all tests.
Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests
Step Action
1If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 and
Figure 3-9).
2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.
3If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-14 through Figure 3-17, as applicable for the test
equipment being used, to set up for acceptance testing.
* IMPORTANT
CDMA LMF–based measurement commands factor in TX test cable loss between the RFM frame and
test equipment. No additional attenuation can be inserted as the additional losses would not be
factored in.
4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-4
All–inclusive Tests
The all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from the LMF GUI
environment. These tests execute various combinations of individual
acceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification of
multiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed for
individual test set up and initiation.
There are three abbreviated acceptance tests which evaluate different
performance aspects of the BTS. This allows the CFE to select testing to
meet the specific requirements for individual maintenance and
performance verification situations. The following summarizes the
coverage of each abbreviated test:
SAll TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBXs in one test.
SAll TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selected
MCCs and BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of the
following individual tests:
–TX Mask Test
–Rho Test
–Pilot Time Offset Test
–Code Domain Power Test
SAll RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs and
BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:
–FER Test
4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued
08/15/2000 4-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
All TX/RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-2 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit and receive test.
Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select All TX/RX.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
All TX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-3 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive transmit test.
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select All TX.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
. . . continued on next page
4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-6
Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure
Step Action
8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
All RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-4 to perform the abbreviated,
all–inclusive receive test.
Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select All RX.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction
08/15/2000 4-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specific
aspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.
All testing is performed using the CDMA LMF GUI environment.
TX Testing
TX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output power
control. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set. All
measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA Forward Link using
all BBXs assigned to all respective sector/antennas. Each BBX is keyed
up to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbx level and bay level
offsets) at the cdf file carrier output power level (as specified in the site
documentation).
RX Testing
RX testing verifies any given receive antenna path. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set to inject a CDMA RF
carrier with all zero longcode at the specified RX frequency via the
appropriate RX IN connector.
RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link using
all equipped BDC/MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.
Individual Tests
Spectral Purity TX Mask
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification (as defined
in IS–97) with respect to the assigned cdf file values.
Waveform Quality (Rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.
Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMA
modulation spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Walsh
code 0).
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
4
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-8
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel
power).
BTS Frame Error Rate
This test verifies the BTS receive Frame Error Rate (FER) on all Traffic
Channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate at
one percent FER) at an RF input level of –119 dBm on the main RX
antenna paths using all equipped MCCs, BBXs, and BDCs at the site.
The diversity RX antenna paths are also tested using the lowest equipped
MCC/CE ONLY.
There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FER readings
taken at level below –119 dBm, other than to verify that
the FER measurement reflects changes in the RX input
signal level.
NOTE
4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
08/15/2000 4-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Background
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 541 for each antenna, and the
forward link will be disabled for all TCH elements from the MCCs. The
BBX will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to
generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). RF output
will be set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products with respect to the
mean power of the CDMA channel measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth,
in dB, verifying that results meet system tolerances at the following test
points (see also Figure 4-1):
SAt least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency.
SAt least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency.
SAt least –60 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency.
SAt least –60 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency.
SAt least –60 dB @ –1980 kHz from center frequency.
SAt least –60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency.
Spurious and IM products at + 900 kHz from center
frequency are also measured, but there is no pass/fail
criteria. This measurement is provided for information
purposes only.
NOTE
The BBX will then dekey, and if selected, the BDC will be
re–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX
antenna path under test. The test will then be repeated.
4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-10
Spectral Purity TX Mask
Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-5 to verify the transmit spectral mask
specification on all TX antenna paths using all BBXs equipped at the
BTS.
Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
08/15/2000 4-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
– 900 kHz + 900 kHz
Center Frequency Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
– 1980 kHz
+750 kHz
+ 1980 kHz
– 750 kHz
4
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-12
Background
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH
elements from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX will be
keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA
carrier (with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). RF output
power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) percentage, verifying
that the result meets system tolerances:
Waveform quality (Rho) should be > 0.912 (–0.4 %).
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will be
re–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX
antenna path under test. The test will then be repeated.
Waveform Quality (Rho)
Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-6 to verify the Pilot channel element
waveform quality (rho) on the specified TX antenna paths using BBXs
and BDCs equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho)
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select Rho.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
08/15/2000 4-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Background
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests will be performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
will be via the TX OUT connector.
The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 262 for each antenna and all TCH
elements from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX will be
keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA
carrier (with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). TX power
output is set at 40 dBm as measured at the TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the Pilot
Time Offset in ms, verifying that results meet system tolerances:
Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset
(zero ms).
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will be
re–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX
antenna path under test. The test will then be repeated.
This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency and
TX Waveform Quality (rho) ATP tests, however, only Pilot
Time Offset results are written to the ATP test report.
NOTE
Pilot Time Offset Acceptance
Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-7 to verify the Pilot Time Offset on the
specified TX antenna paths using BBXs and BDCs equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select Pilot Time Offset.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
. . . continued on next page
4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Tests – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-14
Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset
Step Action
7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
08/15/2000 4-15
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Background
This test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floor of each BBX
carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file
assignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set
controlled by the same command. All measurements are via the
appropriate TX OUT connector.
The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all equipped
MCCs will be configured to supply all odd–numbered Walsh code
Traffic channel elements by enabling Orthagonal Channel Noise Source
(OCNS) on all odd MCC/CEs, (maximum 32 full rate channels with an
OCNS gain of 81). All even–numbered Walsh code Traffic channel
elements will not have OCNS enabled, and are considered “OFF”. All
equipped MCCs will be
forward link enabled for the antenna/sector under test.
The BBX will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to
generate a CDMA carrier consisting of pilot and OCNS channels. RF
output power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.
The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the
channel element power (dB) of all specified Walsh channels within the
CDMA spectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify the
following parameters are met (Figure 4-2):
STraffic channel element power level will be verified by calculating the
ratio of PILOT power to OCNS gain of all traffic channels
(root sum of the square (RSS) of each OCNS gain divided by the Pilot
power). This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.
SNoise floor (unassigned “OFF” even numbered Walsh channels) are
verified to be < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will be
re–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX
antenna path under test. The test will then be repeated. Upon completion
of the test, OCNS channels will be disabled on the specified MCC/CEs.
Code Domain Power/Noise
Floor Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-8 to verify the Code Domain Power/Noise
floor of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency.
4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-16
Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
08/15/2000 4-17
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Pilot Channel
Active channels
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB 12.2 dB
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
Pilot Channel
Active channels
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dB
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) Example
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example
4
RX FER Acceptance Test
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-18
Background
This test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on all Traffic
Channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate
at 1% FER) at –119 dBm on the main RX antenna paths. The test is
performed on all diversity RX antenna path using only the lowest
equipped MCC/CE. All tests are performed using the external calibrated
test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All
measurements are via the LMF.
The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 262 for each TX antenna, and the
forward link for all TCH elements from the MCCs will be disabled. The
BBX will be keyed up using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a
CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). TX power output is set
at +10 dBm. (The BBX must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive
circuitry.)
The LMF will prompt the MCC/CE under test to measure all–zero
longcode and provide the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) report on the
selected active MCC on the Reverse Link for both the main and diversity
RX antenna paths, verifying results meet the following specification:
FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500.
The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will be
re–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX
antenna paths under test. The test will then be repeated.
4
RX FER Acceptance Test – continued
08/15/2000 4-19
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
FER Acceptance Test
Follow the steps in Table 4-9 to verify the FER on all RX antenna paths
using all BBXs equipped at the BTS.
Table 4-9: Test FER
Step Action
1Set up the test equipment for RX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.
2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.
3From the Tests menu, select FER.
4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.
5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
6From the RX Branch pick list, select the branch/branches to be tested.
7Select the desired rate from the Rate Set pick list (1 = 9600, 2 = 14400).
8 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.
9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in the
status report window.
10 Click Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4
Generating an ATP Report
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
4-20
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated and must be
saved using the Save Results button to close the status report window.
The ATP report will not be updated if the status reports window is closed
using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
A separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following for
each test:
STest name
SPASS or FAIL
SDescription information (if applicable)
SBBX number
SBDC number
SChannel number
SCarrier number
SSector number
SUpper test limit
SLower test limit
STest result
STime stamp
SDetails/Warning information (if applicable)
Follow the procedures in the Table 4-10 to view and create a printable
file for the ATP report.
Table 4-10: Generating an ATP Report
Step Action
1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.
3Click on the Report button.
4Click on a column heading to start the report.
5If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.
6If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the pick list and click on the Save
button.
4
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 5: Leaving the Site
Table of Contents
Updating Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating CBSC Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepare to Leave the Site 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing External Test Equipment 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing Modules into Service with the CDMA LMF 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting BTS T1 Spans 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
5
Updating Calibration Data Files
08/15/2000 5-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Updating CBSC Calibration
Data Files
After completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL file
information must be moved from the LMF Windows environment back
to the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detail
moving files from one environment to the other.
Copying CAL files from LMF to a Disk
Follow the procedures in Table 5-1 to copy the CAL files from a CDMA
LMF computer to a 3.5 diskette.
Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette
Step Action
1With Windows running on the CDMA LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:.
2Launch the Windows Explorer Program from your Programs menu list.
3Select the applicable wlmf/cdma/bts–# folder.
4Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.
5Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders.
Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Step Action
1Log in to the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation using your account name and password.
2Place your diskette containing calibration file(s) in the workstation diskette drive.
3Type in eject –q and press the Enter key.
4Type in mount and press the Enter key.
NOTE
SCheck to see that the message “floppy/no_name” is displayed on the last line.
SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.
Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
5Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.
6Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the diskette.
7Type in cd and press the Enter key.
8Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).
. . . continued on next page
5
Back Up Calibration Data Files – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
5-2
Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Step Action
9 With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in your home
directory by entering the following command:
dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is BTS
number).
NOTE
Other versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp
(copy) command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited out
with a Unix text editor.
10 Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the cal files have been copied.
11 Type in eject and press the Enter key.
12 Remove the diskette from the workstation.
5
Prepare to Leave the Site
08/15/2000 5-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Removing External Test
Equipment Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment
Step Action
1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.
2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.
! CAUTION
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct ports on the frame. Crossed
antenna cables will cause system degradation of call processing.
Reset All Devices and Initialize
Site Remotely
Generally, devices in the BTS should not be left with data and code
loaded from the CDMA LMF. The configuration data and code loads
used for normal operation could be different from those stored in the
CDMA LMF files. By resetting all devices, the required data and code
can be loaded from the CBSC when spans are again active.
To reset all devices and have the OMCR/CBSC bring up the site
remotely, perform the procedure in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization
Step Action
1Terminate the CDMA LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.
2Cycle BTS power off and on.
3Reconnect spans by following the procedures in Table 5-7.
4Notify the OMCR/CBSC to take control of the site and download code and data to the BTS.
5Verify the CBSC can communicate with the GLIs.
Bringing Modules into Service
with the CDMA LMF
Whenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the site
and enable all devices at the BTS.
IMPORTANT
*
If there is a reason code and/or data should or could not be loaded
remotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 5-5 as
required to bring BTS processor modules from the OOS to INS mode.
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
5-4
Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service
Step Action
1In the CDMA LMF GUI environment, select the device(s) you wish to enable.
NOTE
SThe MGLI, CSM, and applicable BDC must be INS before an MCC can be enabled to INS.
SProcessors which must be enabled and the order of enabling are as follows:
– MGLI
– GLI
– CSMs
– BDCs
– MCCs
– Gateways
2Click on Device from the menu bar.
3Click on Enable from the Device menu. A status report window is displayed.
NOTE
If a BBX is selected, a transceiver parameters window is displayed to collect keying information. Do
not enable the BBX.
4 Click Cancel to close the transceiver parameters window, if applicable.
5 Click OK to close the status report window.
The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.
Terminating LMF
Session/Removing Terminal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-6 as required to terminate the LMF
GUI session and remove the CDMA LMF computer.
Table 5-6: Remove LMF
Step Action
! CAUTION
Do not power down the CDMA LMF terminal without performing the procedure below.
Corrupted/lost data files may result.
1Log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menu bar
and selecting Exit from the File menu list.
2 Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up message which appears.
3In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown.
4 Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears
5Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.
. . . continued on next page
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
08/15/2000 5-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 5-6: Remove LMF
Step Action
6Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal Ethernet port from the BTS cabinet.
7Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal serial port, the RS–232–to–GPIB interface box, and the
GPIB cables as required for equipment transport.
Connecting BTS T1 Spans
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span surge suppressors removed
previously to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7 and
NO TAG as required.
Table 5-7: Connect T1 Span/Modem Cable
Step Action
1Re–connect and disconnected span surge suppressors on the 50–pin punchblock.
2If equipped, ensure the CSU is powered on.
3Verify span status, ensuring the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
5-6
Notes
5
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
Basic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Errors 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-10.
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation 6-12
No GPS Reference Source 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Problems 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
RFDS – Fault Isolation 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All RX and TX paths fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All tests fail on a single antenna 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI2, CSM, BBX2, MCC24,
MCC8E) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX2 LED Status Combinations 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC24 LED Status Combinations 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
08/15/2000 6-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Overview
The information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
6
Troubleshooting: Installation
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-2
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
nStep Action
1If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 by
re-seating it. If this persists, install RGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A Red
LED may also indicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.
2Verify that T1 is disconnected at the Channel Signaling Unit (CSU). If T1 is still
connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
3Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI2.
4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in front of the
BTS.
5Verify the LMF was configured properly.
6If a Xircom parallel BNC LAN interface is being used, verify the BTS-LMF cable
is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).
7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly.
8Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF side port if connected to the BTS front
LMF primary port.
9Try connecting to the Ethernet Out port in the power entry compartment (back of
frame). Use Triax to BNC adapter at the LMF port for this connection.
10 Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.
11 Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.
12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
Cannot Communicate to Power
Meter
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
nStep Action
1Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
2Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
3Verify the GP–IB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test
Equipment setup section of Chapter 3 for details.
4Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.
5Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.
6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
08/15/2000 6-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Cannot Communicate to
Communications Analyzer
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
nStep Action
1Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
2Verify cable setup.
3Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.
4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment
setup section for details.
5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
then power-cycle the GPIB Box and retry.
6If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.
7Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18.
8Verify the analyzer is in Talk and Listen not Control mode.
6
Troubleshooting: Download
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-4
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
nStep Action
1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.
2Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
3Communication to MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any
other BTS device. MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).
4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
5If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it.
If this persists, replace card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
6Re-seat card and try again.
7If BBX2 reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
Status it.
8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by
selecting the device and reset.
Cannot Download DATA to Any
Device (Card)
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
nStep Action
1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
2Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the
card. Refer to Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.
6
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
08/15/2000 6-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to the
device. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it is
enabled.
The three states that devices can be displayed:
SEnabled (green, INS)
SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
nStep Action
1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.
2If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude
data for cell site location and GPS sync.
3Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
4Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock is present; MCCs will not go INS without it.
5BBXs should not be enabled for ATP tests.
6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled.
6
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-6
LPA Errors
Table 6-7: LPA Errors
nStep Action
1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers,
then connect an MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection.
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display may
provide an indication of the problem. (Call Field Support for further assistance.)
6
Troubleshooting: Calibration
08/15/2000 6-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
nStep Action
1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup
section) and connection is made to the proper TX port.
2Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following
bands:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8
3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from the power sensor.
5Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GP-IB Box and retry.
6Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0
dBm) Power Ref signal.
7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working, the Meter
display will show “RES :’’
8Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan.
6
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-8
Calibration Audit Failure
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
nStep Action
1Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup
section).
2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors
from the power sensor.
3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by
pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
4Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0
dBm) Power Ref signal.
5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Donwload Code>Download Data>Enable.
Re-try the audit.
6Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green
LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,
power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GP–IB Box and retry.
6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
08/15/2000 6-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Cannot Perform Txmask
Measurement
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX2(s).
2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot
Time Offset Measurement
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the
CDF file.
3Re–load MGLI2 data and repeat the test.
4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the
LPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may
indicate that the GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq.
error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz.
Press <Shift–avg> and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an
indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to be
re-initialized.
6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-10
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the
CDF file.
3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
Cannot Perform Carrier
Measurement
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability
10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to
test set-up.
6
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
08/15/2000 6-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Multi–FER Test Failure
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
nStep Action
1Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.
2Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellow
LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
3Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
4Disable and re-enable the MCC (1 or more based on extent of failure).
5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on
extent of failure).
6Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-12
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may be
resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.
This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,
some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock / GPS
Receiver Operation If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model AB
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit
SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly
configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to
change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS
antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board
back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or
higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of
CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.
Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM
board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in
the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132
must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to
function correctly.
CSM Kit No. Hardware Configuration CSM Slot No. Reference Source Configuration
SGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
SGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued
08/15/2000 6-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy
flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPS
and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite
should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellites
should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verify
correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-14
Introduction
The SCCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
SCCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will
allow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:
SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
SAllow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” ISB (Inter Shelf Bus)
connectors
The 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the master
GLI2 to all other GLI2s in the modem frame. Its basic function is to
provide clock synchronization from the master GLI2 to all other GLI2s
in the frame.
The ISB is also provides the following functions:
SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages
SProvide MMI connection to/from the master GLI2 to cell site modem
SProvide interface between GLI2s and the AMR (for reporting BTS
alarms)
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8 pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the SCCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI2 and also all the BBX2 traffic.
Power Input (Return A and B connectors)
Provides a 27 volt input for use by the power supply modules.
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the SCCP backplane. These include
a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin interface,
and a +15V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver Power
Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 volts to be
used by the SCCP shelf cards.
GLI2 Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the SCCP backplane.
6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
08/15/2000 6-15
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the SCCP backplane and routed to
the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI2 and the other GLI2, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX2 Connector
Each BBX2 connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBX2s in the SCCP backplane.
CIO Connectors
SRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –
the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the
SCCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to the
appropriate BBX2.
SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX2, to
the backplane, then on to the MCC24 slots.
SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Each
output is routed from the MCC24 slot via the backplane appropriate
BBX2.
STX RF path signal originates from the BBX2, through the backplane
to the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling
to the LPAs in the LPA shelf.
SCCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
The following table provides a standard procedure for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective SCCP backplane. The
table is broken down into possible problems and steps which should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
It is important to note that all steps be followed before
replacing ANY SCCP backplane.
IMPORTANT
*
6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-16
Digital Control Problems
No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Step Action
1Check the Ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or
opens.
2Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and
backplane) for damage.
4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)
Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both
GLI2s)
Step Action
1Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
2Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR/CBSC data base.
3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and
backplane) for damage.
4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the
master GLI2 for proper connection and damage.
Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
GLI2
Step Action
1Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the
OMCR CBSC data base.
2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or
opens.
3Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and
backplane) for damage.
4Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
08/15/2000 6-17
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)
Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR
Step Action
1Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and
backplane) for damage.
2Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX2 Control in the Shelf
Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located
GLI2s
Step Action
1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and
backplane) for damage.
2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
3Visually check BBX2 connectors (both board and backplane)
for damage.
4Replace the BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Table 6-20: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step Action
1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and
backplane) for damage.
2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and
cables) for damage.
4If the problem seems to be limited to 1 BBX2, replace the
BBX2 with a known good BBX2.
No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel Elements
Table 6-21: No MCC24 Channel Elements
Step Action
1Verify CEs on a co–located MCC24 (MccType=2)
2If the problem seems to be limited to 1 MCC24, replace the
MCC24 with a known good MCC24.
– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
3If no CEs on any MCC24:
– Verify clock reference to CIO.
6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-18
DC Power Problems
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
WARNING
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step Action
1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame. Verify there are
no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the
applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and attempt to reset it.
– If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker
problem within the frame.
– If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective
module or sub–assembly within the shelf.
2Verify that the SCCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker
panel is functional.
3Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being
routed to the SCCP backplane by measuring the DC voltage
level on the PWR_IN cable.
– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or
breaker problem within the frame.
– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and
measure the level at the “VCC” power feed clip on the
distribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at the
power clip, inspect the clip for damage.
4If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power
supply module connectors.
5Replace the power supply module with a known good
module.
6If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, the SCCP
backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has occurred.
6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
08/15/2000 6-19
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,
BBX2, or Switchboard
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module
Step Action
1Verify steps outlined in Table 6-22 have been performed.
2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and
backplane) connector for damage.
3Replace suspect board/module with known good
board/module.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module
Step Action
1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane
connectors for damage in all the affected board slots.
2Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting
flowchart in this manual.
6
RFDS – Fault Isolation
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-20
Introduction
The RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification and
Post-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate and
reported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through the
directional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to the
following tables.
All tests fail
Table 6-25: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail
Step Action
1Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator output
attenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzer
rf input port.
2Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that the
spectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cable
insertion loss), and the approximate frequency.
3Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects to
the RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.
4Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.
5Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.
6Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check (both
board and backplane) for damage.
7Replace any boards that do not show green with known good boards one at a time in the following
order. Re–test after each is replaced.
– RFDS ASU board.
– RFDS Transceiver board.
All RX and TX paths fail
If every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies with
the rf converter board or the transceiver board. Refer to the following
table for fault isolation procedures.
Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation – All RX and TX paths fail
Step Action
1Visually check the master RF converter board (both board and backplane) for damage.
2Replace the RF converter board with a known good RF converter board.
3Visually check RXCVR TSU (both board and backplane) for damage.
4Replace the TSU with a known good TSU.
6
RFDS – Fault Isolation – continued
08/15/2000 6-21
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
All tests fail on a single
antenna
If all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,
make the following checks.
Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path
Step Action
1Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antenna
port.
2Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on the
RFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.
3Visually check ASU connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
4Replace the ASU with a known good ASU.
5Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.
NOTE
Externally route the cable to bypass suspect segment.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-22
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for
All Modules (except GLI2, CSM,
BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status
Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
08/15/2000 6-23
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
CSM LED Status Combinations PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
SSolid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or
INS_ACT in DUMB mode.
SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
SOff – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
SSolid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
FW00303
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
. . . continued on next page
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-24
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232
MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development
or factory environment, but may be used in the field for
debug/maintenance purposes.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
08/15/2000 6-25
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
GLI2 LED Status Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-2.
The indicators and controls consist of:
SFour LEDs
SOne pushbutton
ACTIVE LED
Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER LED
SSolid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
SOff – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM LED
SSolid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
SOff – No Alarm.
STATUS LED
SFlashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
SOn – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
SOff – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS LED
SSolid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
SSolid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-26
GLI2 Pushbuttons and
Connectors RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a
partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. GLI2 will be
placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be
used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be
used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
ACTIVE LED
STATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE
STATUS LED
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators
STATUS OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
RESET
ALARM OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
SPANS
MASTER
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
ACTIVE
All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing
the switch.
ON - operating normally in active card
OFF - operating normally in standby card
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON - active card operating normally
OFF - standby card operating normally
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the
top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in
the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN - operating normally
YELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
FW00225
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
08/15/2000 6-27
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
BBX2 LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
SSolid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
SSolid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
MCC24 LED Status
Combinations
The MCC24 module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below. See Figure 6-3. Note that the figure does not show the connectors
as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
SRED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
SOff – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
SRapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
SSolid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
SThe RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
SThe RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
. . . continued on next page
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-28
PWR/ALM LED
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE LED
PWR/ALM ACTIVE
Figure 6-3: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators
PWR/ALM OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup and during failure
ąconditions
ACTIVE
RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded but
ąnot enabled
SLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloaded
ON - card is codeĆloaded and enabled
ą(INS_ACTIVE)
GREEN
RED
RED ON - fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHI
ąbus inactive on powerĆup
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status
Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module is provided with a bi–color LED on the ETIB module
next to the MMI connector. Interpret this LED as follows:
SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
SFlashing RED — LPA is in alarm.
6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
08/15/2000 6-29
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Span Problems (No Control
Link)
Table 6-28: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure
nStep Action
1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 as shown in
Figure 6-4.
2Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 by using the Windows
desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).
3Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI2>
prompt is obtained.
4At the GLI2> prompt, enter:
span view <cr>
The system will respond with a display similar to the following framing format and line code
configuration example:
COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.
56K AMI 64K B8ZS
Span Type–T1–3 Span Type–T1–2
Span Rate=56 Span Rate=64
Span A Type–T1 long haul Span A Type–T1 long haul
Span A Type–T1 long haul Span A Type–T1 long haul
Lapd slot for Span A=0 Lapd slot for Span A=0
Lapd slot for Span B=0 Lapd slot for Span B=0
5The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for the
BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-29.
6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.
7If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.
Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
STry looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the looped
signal is good.
SListen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.
8Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
9If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole SCCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISB
cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-30
Figure 6-4: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE (P/N
30–09786R01)
RS–232 CABLE
8–PIN
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
To MMI port
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
COM1
OR
COM2
ACTIVE LED
STATUS LED
ALARM LED
MASTER LED
MMI Port
Connector
STATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE
SPANS LED
RESET
Pushbutton
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span
configurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match
those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the
exact configuration data is available. Loading incorrect
span configuration data will render the site inoperable.
IMPORTANT
*
6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
08/15/2000 6-31
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table 6-29: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
nStep Action
1If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable
MGLI2/GLI2 as shown in Figure 6-4.
2If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2, initiate
one by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).
3At the GLI2> prompt, enter:
span set
<option>
<cr>
Where: option = the framing format option from the list below:
Option Description
E1_1 E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16
E1_2 E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16
E1_3 E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16
E1_4 E1_3 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16
T1_1 T1_1 – D4 AMI NO ZCS
T1_2 T1_2 – ESF B8ZS
T1_3 T1_3 – D4 AMI ZCS
J1_1 J1_1 – ESF B8ZS (Japan) – (Default)
J1_2 J1_2 – ESF B8ZS
Example – to set span to “E1_3”:
span set E1_3 <cr>
4Observe that an acknowledgement is displayed.
5Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/GLI2 span rate:
config ni linkspeed <cr>
6Observe that a response is displayed similar to the following output example:
Option Linkspeed Option
56 56k (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems)
64 64k (default for all other span configurations)
default Use the default speed appropriate for the span type
The linkspeed parameter in flash is set to use 64k.
Currently the link is running at 64.
The actual rate is 0.
* IMPORTANT
After executing the span set and config ni linkspeed commands, the affected MGLI2/GLI2
board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate
used at the site.
. . . continued on next page
6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
6-32
Table 6-29: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
nActionStep
7Press the RESET button on the MGLI2/GLI2 for changes to take effect.
8Return to step 6 of Table 6-28.
6
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix Content
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Verification A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCCP Shelf A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
08/15/2000 A-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Verification of Test Equipment
Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer Model Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
A-2
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Deliveries Per established procedures
-Floor Plan Verified
-
-
-
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
-
-
-
Factory Data:
BBX2
Test Panel
RFDS
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
-Site Temperature
-Dress Covers/Brackets
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage
-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedure
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
08/15/2000 A-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Pre–Power and Initial Power
Tests
Table A3a: Pre–power Checklist
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Pre–power–up tests Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Internal Cables:
ISB (all cages)
CSM (all cages)
Power (all cages)
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
Ethernet Boots
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed
-Initial power–up tests Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications:
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
A-4
General Optimization Checklist
Table A3b: Pre–power Checklist
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-
-
LEDs
Frame fans
illuminated
operational
-
-
-
-
LMF to BTS Connection
Preparing the LMF
Log into the LMF PC
Create site specific BTS directory
Download device loads
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
-
-
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
per procedure
per procedure
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Download/Enable MGLI2s
Download/Enable GLI2s
Set Site Span Configuration
Download CSMs
Enable CSMs
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCC24s
Download BBX2s
Download TSU (in RFDS)
Program TSU NAM
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
-Test Set Calibration per procedure
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
08/15/2000 A-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
-Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in
msec and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
-Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
-Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameter
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
A-6
LFR Receiver Operation
Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Station call letters M X Y Z
assignment. as specified in site
documentation
-SN ratio is > 8 dB
-LFR Task State: 1fr
locked to station xxxx
Verify parameter
-Current reference source:
Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
08/15/2000 A-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter Comments
OK
LPA
CARRIER
Specification
OK
LPA
#2:1
3–Sector BP
3–Sector
Specification
-1A C1 C1 No Alarms
-1B C1 C1 No Alarms
-1C C1 C1 No Alarms
-1D C1 C1 No Alarms
-3A C2 C2 No Alarms
-3B C2 C2 No Alarms
-3C C2 C2 No Alarms
-3D C2 C2 No Alarms
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
A-8
TX Bay Level Offset / Power
Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations 1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier
1
BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier
2
BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
08/15/2000 A-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
2–Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX2–7, ANT–4 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
BBX2–8, ANT–5 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX2–9, ANT–6 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB
-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier
1
BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX2–7, ANT–4 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX2–8, ANT–5 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB
-
carrier
2
BBX2–9, ANT–6 = dB
BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
A-10
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR
OK Parameter Specification Data
-VSWR –
Antenna A1 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna A2 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna A3 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna B4 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna B5 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna B6 < (1.5 : 1)
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
08/15/2000 A-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR
OK Parameter Specification Data
-VSWR –
Antenna A1 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna A2 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna A3 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna B4 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna B5 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna BXC6 < (1.5 : 1)
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Alarm Verification
Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK Parameter Specification Data
-
Verify CDI alarm input
operation per Table 3-1. BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
A-12
Notes
A
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List
08/15/2000 A-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Date Site
SCCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
SCCP Shelf
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fans 1–3
GLI2–1
GLI2–2
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
BBX2–4
BBX2–5
BBX2–6
BBX2–R1
MCC24–1
MCC24–2
MCC24–3
MCC24–4
CIO
SWITCH
PS–1
PS–2
PS–3
A
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
A-14
LPAs
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
A
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix Content
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
B
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
08/15/2000 B-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in
the tables below must be performed anytime a RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
IMPORTANT
*
BTS Frame
Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS
Item Replaced Optimize:
SCCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to all
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
(SCCP) shelves.
Multicoupler/
Preselector Card The three or six affected sector RX paths for
the SCCP shelf in the BTS frames.
Preselector I/O All sector RX paths.
BBX2 board RX and TX paths of the affected SCCP
shelf / BBX2 board.
CIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affected
CDMA carrier.
Any LPA Module The affected sector TX path.
Ancillary Frame
Item Replaced Optimize:
Directional Coupler All affected sector RX and TX paths to all
BTS frame shelves.
Site filter All affected RX sector paths in all shelves
in all BTS frames.
Any RFDS component
or TSU. The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths
(MONFWD/GENFWD).
B
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
B-2
Inter-frame Cabling
Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling
between BTS frames.
Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling
Item Replaced Optimize:
Expansion frame to BTS
frame (RX) cables The affected sector/antenna RX
paths.
BTS frame to expansion
frame (TX) cables The affected sector/antenna TX paths.
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test
Matrix
Table B-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line
is indicated in Table B-3. It is meant to be used as a
guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar
enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to
understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and
BTS site preparation will be required before performing the
Table # procedures referenced.
IMPORTANT
*
Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional
couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration
audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX
path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be
repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is
warranted.
Whenever any SCCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that only
power to the SCCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the breaker
supplying that shelf.
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow
paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX
calibration audit command.
NOTE
When the CIO is replaced, the SCCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX2 boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their
B
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
08/15/2000 B-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
B
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
B-4
Table B-3: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
Doc
Tbl
#Description
Directional Coupler (RX)
Directional Coupler (TX)
RX Filter
RX Cables
TX Cables
Multicoupler/Preselector
CIO
SCCP Backplane
BBX2
MCC24
CSM
LFR/HSO
GPS
GLI2
LPA
LPA Filter Bandpass
Power Converters (See Note)
SWITCH CARD
LPA Combiner Filter 2:1
Table 2-1
Initial Boards/Modules
Install, Preliminary
Operations, CDF Site
Equipage; etc.
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Table 2-6 Initial Power-up D D
NO TAG/
NO TAG Start LMF D D D D D D
NO TAG/
NO TAG Download Code D D
Table 3-16 Enable CSMs D D
Table 3-19 GPS Initialization /
Verification D D D
Table 3-20 LFR Initialization /
Verification D D
Table 3-33 TX Path Calibration D D D
Table 3-34 Download Offsets to BBX2 D D D
Table 3-35 TX Path Calibration Audit D D D D D D D D D
Table 4–1 Spectral Purity TX Mask D D D D D D
Table 4–1 Waveform Quality (rho) D D D D D D D D
Table 4–1 Pilot Time Offset D D D D D D D D
Table 4–1 Code Domain Power /
Noise Floor DDD
Table 4–1 FER Test DDDDD
NOTE
Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the SCCP shelf is not lost. If power to the
shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
B
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Appendix Content
Usage & Background C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
C
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
08/15/2000 C-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Usage & Background
Table C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX2 Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant
RF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the
table. The table assumes that the BBX2 Bay Level Offset (BLO) values
have been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX2 keyed up to produce a CDMA
carrier with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled).
Pilot gain is set to 262. In this case, the BBX2 Gain Set Point is shown
to correlate exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44
dBm output range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm'
Gainb
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
541 – – – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3
533 – – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2
525 – – – – – – – 43 42 41 40 39
517 – – – – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9
509 – – – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8
501 – – – – – – – 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6
493 – – – – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5
485 – – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4
477 – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2
469 – – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1
461 – – – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9
453 – – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8
445 – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6
437 – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4
429 – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3
421 – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1
413 – – – – – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
405 – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8
397 – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6
389 – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4
. . . continued on next page
C
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
C-2
Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm'
Gainb
333435363738394041424344
381 – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3
374 – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1
366 – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9
358 – – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7
350 – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5
342 – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3
334 – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1
326 – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9
318 – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7
310 – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5
302 – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2
294 – – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
286 – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8
278 – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5
270 – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3
262 – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
254 – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 32.7
246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 32.4
238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2
230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 32.9 31.9
222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 32.6 31.6
214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2 31.2
C
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
Appendix Content
1900 MHz PCS Channels D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
PCS Bands
08/15/2000 D-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX2 synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLI2s via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the
transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for
each BBX2.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
FW00463
Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
D-2
Calculating 1900 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz
SRX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
25 0019 1931.25 1851.25
50 0032 1932.50 1852.50
75 004B 1933.75 1853.75
100 0064 1935.00 1855.00
125 007D 1936.25 1856.25
150 0096 1937.50 1857.50
175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75
200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00
225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25
250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50
275 0113 1943.75 1863.75
300 012C 1945.00 1865.00
325 0145 1946.25 1866.25
350 015E 1947.50 1867.50
375 0177 1948.75 1868.75
400 0190 1950.00 1870.00
425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25
450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50
475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75
500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00
525 020D 1956.25 1876.25
550 0226 1957.50 1877.50
575 023F 1958.75 1878.75
. . . continued on next page
D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
08/15/2000 D-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
600 0258 1960.00 1880.00
625 0271 1961.25 1881.25
650 028A 1962.50 1882.50
675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75
700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00
725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25
750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50
775 0307 1968.75 1888.75
800 0320 1970.00 1890.00
825 0339 1971.25 1891.25
850 0352 1972.50 1892.50
875 036B 1973.75 1893.75
900 0384 1975.00 1895.00
925 039D 1976.25 1896.25
950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50
975 03CF 1978.75 1898.75
1000 03E8 1980.00 1900.00
1025 0401 1981.25 1901.25
1050 041A 1982.50 1902.50
1075 0433 1983.75 1903.75
1100 044C 1985.00 1905.00
1125 0465 1986.25 1906.25
1150 047E 1987.50 1807.50
1175 0497 1988.75 1908.75
D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
D-4
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
RX FREQ
(MHz)
991
1023
1
333
334
666
667
716
717
799
CHANNEL
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
824.040
825.000
825.030
834.990
835.020
844.980
845.010
846.480
846.510
848.970
869.040
870.000
870.030
879.990
880.020
889.980
890.010
891.480
891.510
893.970
TX FREQ
(MHz)
1013
694
689
311
356
644
739
777
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
SChannels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
SChannels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
SRX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1 0001 870.0300 825.0300
25 0019 870.7500 825.7500
. . . continued on next page
D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
08/15/2000 D-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
50 0032 871.5000 826.5000
75 004B 872.2500 827.2500
100 0064 873.0000 828.0000
125 007D 873.7500 828.7500
150 0096 874.5000 829.5000
175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500
200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000
225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500
250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000
275 0113 878.2500 833.2500
300 012C 879.0000 834.0000
325 0145 879.7500 834.7500
350 015E 880.5000 835.5000
375 0177 881.2500 836.2500
400 0190 882.0000 837.0000
425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500
450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000
475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500
500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000
525 020D 885.7500 840.7500
550 0226 886.5000 841.5000
575 023F 887.2500 842.2500
600 0258 888.0000 843.0000
625 0271 888.7500 843.7500
650 028A 889.5000 844.5000
675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500
700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000
725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500
750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000
775 0307 893.2500 848.2500
NOTE
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013 03F5 869.7000 824.7000
1023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000
D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
D-6
Notes
D
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix Content
PN Offset Background E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Usage E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information
08/15/2000 E-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
PN Offset Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBX2s, where the
corresponding I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table E-1.
PN Offset Usage
There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important to
determine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTS
functionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file
FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with
“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for the
processing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type of
mobile meeting IS–97 specifications.
Observe the following guidelines:
SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), the
FineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 table
MUST be used.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdj
has been set for the 13 chip table.
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL
or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If
necessary, convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimal
before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.
IMPORTANT
*
– If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values from
the 13 chip delay table.
– If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offset
problem, (any mobile meeting the IS–97 specification), use the 14
chip delay table.
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
E-2
If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrong
FineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur.
This will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared”
over several Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh code
that it was assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidence
of smearing is usually identified by Walsh channels not at
correct levels or present when not selected in the Code
Domain Power Test.
IMPORTANT
*
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
08/15/2000 E-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3 29673 25581 73E9 63ED 4096 4096 1000 1000
1 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D 16146 29082 3F12 719A 9167 1571 23CF 0623
2 4700 17398 125C 43F6 2350 8699 092E 21FB 22417 7484 5791 1D3C
3 14406 26333 3846 66DD 7203 32082 1C23 7D52 966 6319 03C6 18AF
4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB 19657 18921 4CC9 49E9 14189 2447 376D 098F
5 17025 2256 4281 08D0 28816 1128 7090 0468 29150 24441 71DE 5F79
6 14745 18651 3999 48DB 19740 27217 4D1C 6A51 18245 27351 4745 6AD7
7 2783 1094 0ADF 0446 21695 547 54BF 0223 1716 23613 06B4 5C3D
8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2 2916 10601 0B64 2969 11915 29008 2E8B 7150
9 12407 13841 3077 3611 18923 21812 49EB 5534 20981 5643 51F5 160B
10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17 27855 28727 6CCF 7037 24694 28085 6076 6DB5
11 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA 24350 9445 5F1E 24E5 11865 18200 2E59 4718
12 18523 30999 485B 7917 30205 29367 75FD 72B7 6385 21138 18F1 5292
13 29920 22420 74E0 5794 14960 11210 3A70 2BCA 27896 21937 6CF8 55B1
14 25184 20168 6260 4EC8 12592 10084 3130 2764 25240 25222 6298 6286
15 26282 12354 66AA 3042 13141 6177 3355 1821 30877 109 789D 006D
16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3 27167 23525 6A1F 5BE5 30618 6028 779A 178C
17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A 7770 5917 1E5A 171D 26373 22034 6705 5612
18 23026 10395 59F2 289B 11513 23153 2CF9 5A71 314 15069 013A 3ADD
19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83 30409 30973 76C9 78FD 17518 4671 446E 123F
20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07 2025 31679 07E9 7BBF 21927 30434 55A7 76E2
21 1557 22087 0615 5647 21210 25887 52DA 651F 2245 11615 08C5 2D5F
22 30262 2077 7636 081D 15131 18994 3B1B 4A32 18105 19838 46B9 4D7E
23 18000 13758 4650 35BE 9000 6879 2328 1ADF 8792 14713 2258 3979
24 20056 11778 4E58 2E02 10028 5889 272C 1701 21440 241 53C0 00F1
25 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7 18023 18647 4667 48D7 15493 24083 3C85 5E13
26 17437 7184 441D 1C10 29662 3592 73DE 0E08 26677 7621 6835 1DC5
27 17438 2362 441E 093A 8719 1181 220F 049D 11299 19144 2C23 4AC8
28 5102 25840 13EE 64F0 2551 12920 09F7 3278 12081 1047 2F31 0417
29 9302 12177 2456 2F91 4651 23028 122B 59F4 23833 26152 5D19 6628
30 17154 10402 4302 28A2 8577 5201 2181 1451 20281 22402 4F39 5782
31 5198 1917 144E 077D 2599 19842 0A27 4D82 10676 21255 29B4 5307
32 4606 17708 11FE 452C 2303 8854 08FF 2296 16981 30179 4255 75E3
33 24804 10630 60E4 2986 12402 5315 3072 14C3 31964 7408 7CDC 1CF0
34 17180 6812 431C 1A9C 8590 3406 218E 0D4E 26913 115 6921 0073
35 10507 14350 290B 380E 17749 7175 4555 1C07 14080 1591 3700 0637
36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7 16902 23367 4206 5B47 23842 1006 5D22 03EE
37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB 11925 32489 2E95 7EE9 27197 32263 6A3D 7E07
38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C 27824 1326 6CB0 052E 22933 1332 5995 0534
39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA 22053 9949 5625 26DD 30220 12636 760C 315C
40 10030 2010 272E 07DA 5015 1005 1397 03ED 12443 4099 309B 1003
41 16984 25936 4258 6550 8492 12968 212C 32A8 19854 386 4D8E 0182
42 14225 28531 3791 6F73 18968 31109 4A18 7985 14842 29231 39FA 722F
43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0 25115 5976 621B 1758 15006 25711 3A9E 646F
44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB 26607 28761 67EF 7059 702 10913 02BE 2AA1
45 30100 25589 7594 63F5 15050 32710 3ACA 7FC6 21373 8132 537D 1FC4
46 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51 3961 22548 0F79 5814 23874 20844 5D42 516C
47 14199 28198 3777 6E26 19051 14099 4A6B 3713 3468 13150 0D8C 335E
48 17637 13947 44E5 367B 29602 21761 73A2 5501 31323 18184 7A5B 4708
49 23081 8462 5A29 210E 31940 4231 7CC4 1087 29266 19066 7252 4A7A
50 5099 9595 13EB 257B 22565 23681 5825 5C81 16554 29963 40AA 750B
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
E-4
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E 28195 2335 6E23 091F 22575 6605 582F 19CD
52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950 3557 7336 0DE5 1CA8 31456 29417 7AE0 72E9
53 7699 29415 1E13 72E7 24281 30543 5ED9 774F 8148 22993 1FD4 59D1
54 19339 20610 4B8B 5082 29717 10305 7415 2841 19043 27657 4A63 6C09
55 28212 6479 6E34 194F 14106 17051 371A 429B 25438 5468 635E 155C
56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD 26649 23386 6819 5B5A 10938 8821 2ABA 2275
57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA 30545 9213 7751 23FD 2311 20773 0907 5125
58 14901 22726 3A35 58C6 19658 11363 4CCA 2C63 7392 4920 1CE0 1338
59 20160 5247 4EC0 147F 10080 17411 2760 4403 30714 5756 77FA 167C
60 22249 29953 56E9 7501 31396 29884 7AA4 74BC 180 28088 00B4 6DB8
61 26582 5796 67D6 16A4 13291 2898 33EB 0B52 8948 740 22F4 02E4
62 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD 23592 28386 5C28 6EE2 16432 23397 4030 5B65
63 15127 4528 3B17 11B0 19547 2264 4C5B 08D8 9622 19492 2596 4C24
64 15274 5415 3BAA 1527 7637 17583 1DD5 44AF 7524 26451 1D64 6753
65 23149 10294 5A6D 2836 31974 5147 7CE6 141B 1443 30666 05A3 77CA
66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296 8170 8523 1FEA 214B 1810 15088 0712 3AF0
67 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6 13526 3923 34D6 0F53 6941 26131 1B1D 6613
68 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A 19383 5381 4BB7 1505 3238 15969 0CA6 3E61
69 10620 13814 297C 35F6 5310 6907 14BE 1AFB 8141 24101 1FCD 5E25
70 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6 7989 8427 1F35 20EB 10408 12762 28A8 31DA
71 27966 795 6D3E 031B 13983 20401 369F 4FB1 18826 19997 498A 4E1D
72 12479 9774 30BF 262E 18831 4887 498F 1317 22705 22971 58B1 59BB
73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3 768 24909 0300 614D 3879 12560 0F27 3110
74 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64 22511 1586 57EF 0632 21359 31213 536F 79ED
75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5 22834 19046 5932 4A66 30853 18780 7885 495C
76 17888 21283 45E0 5323 8944 26541 22F0 67AD 18078 16353 469E 3FE1
77 13117 16905 333D 4209 18510 28472 484E 6F38 15910 12055 3E26 2F17
78 7506 7062 1D52 1B96 3753 3531 0EA9 0DCB 20989 30396 51FD 76BC
79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C 13813 3766 35F5 0EB6 28810 24388 708A 5F44
80 31109 25575 7985 63E7 27922 32719 6D12 7FCF 30759 1555 7827 0613
81 29755 14244 743B 37A4 27597 7122 6BCD 1BD2 18899 13316 49D3 3404
82 26711 28053 6857 6D95 26107 30966 65FB 78F6 7739 31073 1E3B 7961
83 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8 30214 15204 7606 3B64 6279 6187 1887 182B
84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6 9304 2547 2458 09F3 9968 21644 26F0 548C
85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E 24511 8111 5FBF 1FAF 8571 9289 217B 2449
86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7 11584 17351 2D40 43C7 4143 4624 102F 1210
87 23466 174 5BAA 00AE 11733 87 2DD5 0057 19637 467 4CB5 01D3
88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA 7966 12765 1F1E 31DD 11867 18133 2E5B 46D5
89 25798 2320 64C6 0910 12899 1160 3263 0488 7374 1532 1CCE 05FC
90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49 14067 25368 36F3 6318 10423 1457 28B7 05B1
91 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1 14012 24804 36BC 60E4 9984 9197 2700 23ED
92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C 23951 1302 5D8F 0516 7445 13451 1D15 348B
93 21508 1826 5404 0722 10754 913 2A02 0391 4133 25785 1025 64B9
94 26338 30853 66E2 7885 13169 29310 3371 727E 22646 4087 5876 0FF7
95 17186 15699 4322 3D53 8593 20629 2191 5095 15466 31190 3C6A 79D6
96 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D 11231 19250 2BDF 4B32 2164 8383 0874 20BF
97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8 1954 12500 07A2 30D4 16380 12995 3FFC 32C3
98 25390 18163 632E 46F3 12695 27973 3197 6D45 15008 27438 3AA0 6B2E
99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B 26537 22201 67A9 56B9 31755 9297 7C0B 2451
100 9620 8670 2594 21DE 4810 4335 12CA 10EF 31636 1676 7B94 068C
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
08/15/2000 E-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
101 6491 1290 195B 050A 23933 645 5D7D 0285 25414 12596 6346 3134
102 16876 4407 41EC 1137 8438 18087 20F6 46A7 7102 19975 1BBE 4E07
103 17034 1163 428A 048B 8517 19577 2145 4C79 20516 20026 5024 4E3A
104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7 28314 23015 6E9A 59E7 19495 8958 4C27 22FE
105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55 25692 16406 645C 4016 17182 19143 431E 4AC7
106 8382 8978 20BE 2312 4191 4489 105F 1189 11572 17142 2D34 42F6
107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB 2812 32729 0AFC 7FD9 25570 19670 63E2 4CD6
108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A 712 1565 02C8 061D 6322 30191 18B2 75EF
109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE 6517 15703 1975 3D57 8009 5822 1F49 16BE
110 15682 6222 3D42 184E 7841 3111 1EA1 0C27 26708 22076 6854 563C
111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74 25918 10170 653E 27BA 6237 606 185D 025E
112 8521 25094 2149 6206 16756 12547 4174 3103 32520 9741 7F08 260D
113 30232 23380 7618 5B54 15116 11690 3B0C 2DAA 31627 9116 7B8B 239C
114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE 23902 5463 5D5E 1557 3532 12705 0DCC 31A1
115 27116 22821 69EC 5925 13558 25262 34F6 62AE 24090 17502 5E1A 445E
116 4238 31634 108E 7B92 2119 15817 0847 3DC9 20262 18952 4F26 4A08
117 5128 4403 1408 1133 2564 18085 0A04 46A5 18238 15502 473E 3C8E
118 14846 689 39FE 02B1 7423 20324 1CFF 4F64 2033 17819 07F1 459B
119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5 6512 31470 1970 7AEE 25566 4370 63DE 1112
120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5 17680 31726 4510 7BEE 25144 31955 6238 7CD3
121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3 15862 20965 3DF6 51E5 29679 30569 73EF 7769
122 13811 22338 35F3 5742 19241 11169 4B29 2BA1 5064 7350 13C8 1CB6
123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E 24953 13775 6179 35CF 27623 26356 6BE7 66F4
124 1213 22096 04BD 5650 21390 11048 538E 2B28 13000 32189 32C8 7DBD
125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60 1145 11568 0479 2D30 31373 1601 7A8D 0641
126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7 27727 23023 6C4F 59EF 13096 19537 3328 4C51
127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD 6044 19554 179C 4C62 26395 25667 671B 6443
128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8 3861 468 0F15 01D4 15487 4415 3C7F 113F
129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880 13656 3136 3558 0C40 29245 2303 723D 08FF
130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE 11565 16223 2D2D 3F5F 26729 16362 6869 3FEA
131 594 13555 0252 34F3 297 21573 0129 5445 12568 28620 3118 6FCC
132 25804 8789 64CC 2255 12902 24342 3266 5F16 24665 6736 6059 1A50
133 31013 24821 7925 60F5 27970 32326 6D42 7E46 8923 2777 22DB 0AD9
134 32585 21068 7F49 524C 28276 10534 6E74 2926 19634 24331 4CB2 5F0B
135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93 22482 28789 57D2 7075 29141 9042 71D5 2352
136 17231 5321 434F 14C9 28791 17496 7077 4458 73 107 0049 006B
137 31554 551 7B42 0227 15777 20271 3DA1 4F2F 26482 4779 6772 12AB
138 8764 12115 223C 2F53 4382 22933 111E 5995 6397 13065 18FD 3309
139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326 20439 2451 4FD7 0993 29818 30421 747A 76D5
140 13428 1991 3474 07C7 6714 19935 1A3A 4DDF 8153 20210 1FD9 4EF2
141 17658 14404 44FA 3844 8829 7202 227D 1C22 302 5651 012E 1613
142 13475 17982 34A3 463E 19329 8991 4B81 231F 28136 31017 6DE8 7929
143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E 31479 9783 7AF7 2637 29125 30719 71C5 77FF
144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A 24994 1485 61A2 05CD 8625 23104 21B1 5A40
145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F 22969 25403 59B9 633B 26671 7799 682F 1E77
146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36 11646 7579 2D7E 1D9B 6424 17865 1918 45C9
147 1377 29094 0561 71A6 21344 14547 5360 38D3 12893 26951 325D 6947
148 28654 653 6FEE 028D 14327 20346 37F7 4F7A 18502 25073 4846 61F1
149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3 3175 27477 0C67 6B55 7765 32381 1E55 7E7D
150 16770 23588 4182 5C24 8385 11794 20C1 2E12 25483 16581 638B 40C5
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
E-6
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E 7363 5439 1CC3 153F 15408 32087 3C30 7D57
152 25685 31060 6455 7954 25594 15530 63FA 3CAA 6414 97 190E 0061
153 21356 30875 536C 789B 10678 29297 29B6 7271 8164 7618 1FE4 1DC2
154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8 18026 5748 466A 1674 10347 93 286B 005D
155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1 14483 25036 3893 61CC 29369 16052 72B9 3EB4
156 22898 9586 5972 2572 11449 4793 2CB9 12B9 10389 14300 2895 37DC
157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8 21128 10492 5288 28FC 24783 11129 60CF 2B79
158 30010 30389 753A 76B5 15005 30054 3A9D 7566 18400 6602 47E0 19CA
159 2365 7298 093D 1C82 21838 3649 554E 0E41 22135 14460 5677 387C
160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6 25797 9467 64C5 24FB 4625 25458 1211 6372
161 29740 23137 742C 5A61 14870 25356 3A16 630C 22346 15869 574A 3DFD
162 5665 24597 1621 6015 23232 32310 5AC0 7E36 2545 27047 09F1 69A7
163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05 32747 25534 7FEB 63BE 7786 26808 1E6A 68B8
164 1680 7764 0690 1E54 840 3882 0348 0F2A 20209 7354 4EF1 1CBA
165 25861 14518 6505 38B6 25426 7259 6352 1C5B 26414 27834 672E 6CBA
166 25712 21634 6470 5482 12856 10817 3238 2A41 1478 11250 05C6 2BF2
167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A 29766 5773 7446 168D 15122 552 3B12 0228
168 26887 26454 6907 6756 25939 13227 6553 33AB 24603 27058 601B 69B2
169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42 28040 7969 6D88 1F21 677 14808 02A5 39D8
170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A 5748 4525 1674 11AD 13705 9642 3589 25AA
171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F 639 18483 027F 4833 13273 32253 33D9 7DFD
172 31555 758 7B43 02F6 27761 379 6C71 017B 14879 26081 3A1F 65E1
173 29171 16528 71F3 4090 26921 8264 6929 2048 6643 21184 19F3 52C0
174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97 10236 27127 27FC 69F7 23138 11748 5A62 2DE4
175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0 2908 5104 0B5C 13F0 28838 32676 70A6 7FA4
176 30270 17698 763E 4522 15135 8849 3B1F 2291 9045 2425 2355 0979
177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5 11094 24150 2B56 5E56 10792 19455 2A28 4BFF
178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA 3091 14317 0C13 37ED 25666 19889 6442 4DB1
179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F 28406 19955 6EF6 4DF3 11546 18177 2D1A 4701
180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78 7023 10172 1B6F 27BC 15535 2492 3CAF 09BC
181 15873 26696 3E01 6848 20176 13348 4ED0 3424 16134 15086 3F06 3AEE
182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B 30481 18609 7711 48B1 8360 30632 20A8 77A8
183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7 26763 22879 688B 595F 14401 27549 3841 6B9D
184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6 6676 15971 1A14 3E63 26045 6911 65BD 1AFF
185 22977 9737 59C1 2609 32048 23864 7D30 5D38 24070 9937 5E06 26D1
186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6 27701 4819 6C35 12D3 30300 2467 765C 09A3
187 10637 30643 298D 77B3 17686 30181 4516 75E5 13602 25831 3522 64E7
188 25454 13230 636E 33AE 12727 6615 31B7 19D7 32679 32236 7FA7 7DEC
189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9 9305 25960 2459 6568 16267 12987 3F8B 32BB
190 6368 2055 18E0 0807 3184 19007 0C70 4A3F 9063 11714 2367 2DC2
191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F 24247 24355 5EB7 5F23 19487 19283 4C1F 4B53
192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC 3865 7926 0F19 1EF6 12778 11542 31EA 2D16
193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD 11738 20802 2DDA 5142 27309 27928 6AAD 6D18
194 889 6074 0379 17BA 20588 3037 506C 0BDD 12527 26637 30EF 680D
195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D 30874 29498 789A 733A 953 10035 03B9 2733
196 20520 15880 5028 3E08 10260 7940 2814 1F04 15958 10748 3E56 29FC
197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93 31618 27125 7B82 69F5 6068 24429 17B4 5F6D
198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA 20223 4333 4EFF 10ED 23577 29701 5C19 7405
199 21639 816 5487 0330 31635 408 7B93 0198 32156 14997 7D9C 3A95
200 31120 22309 7990 5725 15560 26030 3CC8 65AE 32709 32235 7FC5 7DEB
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
08/15/2000 E-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
201 3698 29563 0E72 737B 1849 30593 0739 7781 23557 30766 5C05 782E
202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316 8161 6539 1FE1 198B 17638 5985 44E6 1761
203 17429 10460 4415 28DC 29658 5230 73DA 146E 3545 6823 0DD9 1AA7
204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6 10865 8795 2A71 225B 9299 20973 2453 51ED
205 17808 20277 4590 4F35 8904 27046 22C8 69A6 6323 10197 18B3 27D5
206 30068 19988 7574 4E14 15034 9994 3ABA 270A 19590 9618 4C86 2592
207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D 18736 17154 4930 4302 7075 22705 1BA3 58B1
208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5 26360 28998 66F8 7146 14993 5234 3A91 1472
209 20371 6024 4F93 1788 30233 3012 7619 0BC4 19916 12541 4DCC 30FD
210 13829 20520 3605 5028 19154 10260 4AD2 2814 6532 8019 1984 1F53
211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF 6683 28763 1A1B 705B 17317 22568 43A5 5828
212 25732 26063 6484 65CF 12866 31963 3242 7CDB 16562 5221 40B2 1465
213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43 9932 31517 26CC 7B1D 26923 25216 692B 6280
214 5187 6614 1443 19D6 23537 3307 5BF1 0CEB 9155 1354 23C3 054A
215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA 31881 5485 7C89 156D 20243 29335 4F13 7297
216 28242 5511 6E52 1587 14121 17663 3729 44FF 32391 6682 7E87 1A1A
217 6243 17119 1863 42DF 24033 28499 5DE1 6F53 20190 26128 4EDE 6610
218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0 20750 8032 510E 1F60 27564 29390 6BAC 72CE
219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E 10673 15807 29B1 3DBF 20869 8852 5185 2294
220 13256 4660 33C8 1234 6628 2330 19E4 091A 9791 6110 263F 17DE
221 18472 13881 4828 3639 9236 21792 2414 5520 714 11847 02CA 2E47
222 25945 16819 6559 41B3 25468 28389 637C 6EE5 7498 10239 1D4A 27FF
223 31051 6371 794B 18E3 28021 16973 6D75 424D 23278 6955 5AEE 1B2B
224 1093 24673 0445 6061 21490 32268 53F2 7E0C 8358 10897 20A6 2A91
225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7 23218 17903 5AB2 45EF 9468 14076 24FC 36FC
226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719 15773 23984 3D9D 5DB0 23731 12450 5CB3 30A2
227 29833 5957 7489 1745 27540 17822 6B94 459E 25133 8954 622D 22FA
228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D 9073 22682 2371 589A 2470 19709 09A6 4CFD
229 24813 22155 60ED 568B 24998 25977 61A6 6579 17501 1252 445D 04E4
230 47 15050 002F 3ACA 20935 7525 51C7 1D65 24671 15142 605F 3B26
231 3202 16450 0C82 4042 1601 8225 0641 2021 11930 26958 2E9A 694E
232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB 31729 30785 7BF1 7841 9154 8759 23C2 2237
233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0 24390 1008 5F46 03F0 7388 12696 1CDC 3198
234 25297 17153 62D1 4301 24760 28604 60B8 6FBC 3440 11936 0D70 2EA0
235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9 24103 20680 5E27 50C8 27666 25635 6C12 6423
236 28519 30581 6F67 7775 26211 30086 6663 7586 22888 17231 5968 434F
237 4991 3600 137F 0E10 22639 1800 586F 0708 13194 22298 338A 571A
238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001 24225 17980 5EA1 463C 26710 7330 6856 1CA2
239 17728 671 4540 029F 8864 20339 22A0 4F73 7266 30758 1C62 7826
240 14415 20774 384F 5126 19959 10387 4DF7 2893 15175 6933 3B47 1B15
241 30976 24471 7900 5F97 15488 25079 3C80 61F7 15891 2810 3E13 0AFA
242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD 13188 31578 3384 7B5A 26692 8820 6844 2274
243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC 29931 9694 74EB 25DE 14757 7831 39A5 1E97
244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE 9580 12639 256C 315F 28757 19584 7055 4C80
245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521 1900 23724 076C 5CAC 31342 2944 7A6E 0B80
246 8307 26143 2073 661F 16873 32051 41E9 7D33 19435 19854 4BEB 4D8E
247 12918 13359 3276 342F 6459 21547 193B 542B 2437 10456 0985 28D8
248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A 9821 1077 265D 0435 20573 17036 505D 428C
249 24873 13747 6129 35B3 24900 21733 6144 54E5 18781 2343 495D 0927
250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE 31435 13823 7ACB 35FF 18948 14820 4A04 39E4
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
E-8
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
251 13904 1056 3650 0420 6952 528 1B28 0210 23393 1756 5B61 06DC
252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585 13599 19710 351F 4CFE 5619 19068 15F3 4A7C
253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF 22242 18507 56E2 484B 17052 28716 429C 702C
254 16820 4951 41B4 1357 8410 18327 20DA 4797 21292 31958 532C 7CD6
255 22479 749 57CF 02ED 31287 20298 7A37 4F4A 2868 16097 0B34 3EE1
256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3 3425 17005 0D61 426D 19538 1308 4C52 051C
257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1 7717 20444 1E25 4FDC 24294 3320 5EE6 0CF8
258 19332 2358 4B84 0936 9666 1179 25C2 049B 22895 16682 596F 412A
259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE 4259 14175 10A3 375F 27652 6388 6C04 18F4
260 14698 31198 396A 79DE 7349 15599 1CB5 3CEF 29905 12828 74D1 321C
261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB 10738 22617 29F2 5859 21415 3518 53A7 0DBE
262 30475 8862 770B 229E 27221 4431 6A55 114F 1210 3494 04BA 0DA6
263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7 11992 16999 2ED8 4267 22396 6458 577C 193A
264 1912 7443 0778 1D13 956 16565 03BC 40B5 26552 10717 67B8 29DD
265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E 26087 14287 65E7 37CF 24829 8463 60FD 210F
266 15705 25093 3D59 6205 20348 32574 4F7C 7F3E 8663 27337 21D7 6AC9
267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB 22084 17857 5644 45C1 991 19846 03DF 4D86
268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F 10217 25907 27E9 6533 21926 9388 55A6 24AC
269 16779 32545 418B 7F21 28949 29100 7115 71AC 23306 21201 5B0A 52D1
270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8 27786 3556 6C8A 0DE4 13646 31422 354E 7ABE
271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77 8430 31111 20EE 7987 148 166 0094 00A6
272 8322 10378 2082 288A 4161 5189 1041 1445 24836 28622 6104 6FCE
273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9 14265 21328 37B9 5350 24202 6477 5E8A 194D
274 26934 5125 6936 1405 13467 17470 349B 443E 9820 10704 265C 29D0
275 18806 12528 4976 30F0 9403 6264 24BB 1878 12939 25843 328B 64F3
276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF 10108 25451 277C 636B 2364 25406 093C 633E
277 9245 20959 241D 51DF 17374 26323 43DE 66D3 14820 21523 39E4 5413
278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0 16887 1784 41F7 06F8 2011 8569 07DB 2179
279 18684 26453 48FC 6755 9342 32150 247E 7D96 13549 9590 34ED 2576
280 8220 29421 201C 72ED 4110 30538 100E 774A 28339 22466 6EB3 57C2
281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB 23690 25033 5C8A 61C9 25759 12455 649F 30A7
282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B 17174 23345 4316 5B31 11116 27506 2B6C 6B72
283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC 15816 12630 3DC8 3156 31448 21847 7AD8 5557
284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4 13724 8042 359C 1F6A 27936 28392 6D20 6EE8
285 12417 26028 3081 65AC 18832 13014 4990 32D6 3578 1969 0DFA 07B1
286 30901 29852 78B5 749C 28042 14926 6D8A 3A4E 12371 30715 3053 77FB
287 9366 14978 2496 3A82 4683 7489 124B 1D41 12721 23674 31B1 5C7A
288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96 17968 6091 4630 17CB 10264 22629 2818 5865
289 21458 25143 53D2 6237 10729 32551 29E9 7F27 25344 12857 6300 3239
290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE 3233 7919 0CA1 1EEF 13246 30182 33BE 75E6
291 8999 5336 2327 14D8 16451 2668 4043 0A6C 544 21880 0220 5578
292 26718 21885 685E 557D 13359 25730 342F 6482 9914 6617 26BA 19D9
293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051 1615 26132 064F 6614 4601 27707 11F9 6C3B
294 27961 30097 6D39 7591 26444 29940 674C 74F4 16234 16249 3F6A 3F79
295 28465 21877 6F31 5575 26184 25734 6648 6486 24475 24754 5F9B 60B2
296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25 23699 24622 5C93 602E 26318 31609 66CE 7B79
297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC 8669 13030 21DD 32E6 6224 22689 1850 58A1
298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC 5916 4982 171C 1376 13381 3226 3445 0C9A
299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567 18327 31887 4797 7C8F 30013 4167 753D 1047
300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE 20400 1647 4FB0 066F 22195 25624 56B3 6418
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
08/15/2000 E-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
301 17418 30173 440A 75DD 8709 29906 2205 74D2 30380 10924 76AC 2AAC
302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B 7476 20593 1D34 5071 15337 23096 3BE9 5A38
303 52 5371 0034 14FB 26 17473 001A 4441 10716 22683 29DC 589B
304 27254 10242 6A76 2802 13627 5121 353B 1401 13592 10955 3518 2ACB
305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94 7532 14026 1D6C 36CA 2412 17117 096C 42DD
306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A 5471 7357 155F 1CBD 15453 15837 3C5D 3DDD
307 377 19550 0179 4C5E 20844 9775 516C 262F 13810 22647 35F2 5877
308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2 19007 4433 4A3F 1151 12956 10700 329C 29CC
309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1 32357 21468 7E65 53DC 30538 30293 774A 7655
310 26629 10898 6805 2A92 26066 5449 65D2 1549 10814 5579 2A3E 15CB
311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53 30405 29461 76C5 7315 18939 11057 49FB 2B31
312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13 8043 26677 1F6B 6835 19767 30238 4D37 761E
313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE 12187 639 2F9B 027F 20547 14000 5043 36B0
314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7 17064 22639 42A8 586F 29720 22860 7418 594C
315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0 14682 15696 395A 3D50 31831 27172 7C57 6A24
316 25560 4381 63D8 111D 12780 18098 31EC 46B2 26287 307 66AF 0133
317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32 26348 7449 66EC 1D19 11310 20380 2C2E 4F9C
318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97 24479 24823 5F9F 60F7 25724 26427 647C 673B
319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB 28336 20817 6EB0 5151 21423 10702 53AF 29CE
320 26334 9037 66DE 234D 13167 24474 336F 5F9A 5190 30024 1446 7548
321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62 7380 12081 1CD4 2F31 258 14018 0102 36C2
322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF 7564 16971 1D8C 424B 13978 4297 369A 10C9
323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F 14956 31531 3A6C 7B2B 4670 13938 123E 3672
324 4244 16872 1094 41E8 2122 8436 084A 20F4 23496 25288 5BC8 62C8
325 8499 9072 2133 2370 16713 4536 4149 11B8 23986 27294 5DB2 6A9E
326 9362 12966 2492 32A6 4681 6483 1249 1953 839 31835 0347 7C5B
327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6 16911 14443 420F 386B 11296 8228 2C20 2024
328 30957 25118 78ED 621E 28070 12559 6DA6 310F 30913 12745 78C1 31C9
329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8 18745 10212 4939 27E4 27297 6746 6AA1 1A5A
330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49 9675 17176 25CB 4318 10349 1456 286D 05B0
331 1153 20983 0481 51F7 21392 26311 5390 66C7 32504 27743 7EF8 6C5F
332 29304 12372 7278 3054 14652 6186 393C 182A 18405 27443 47E5 6B33
333 6041 13948 1799 367C 23068 6974 5A1C 1B3E 3526 31045 0DC6 7945
334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B 10834 31729 2A52 7BF1 19161 12225 4AD9 2FC1
335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8 14024 4076 36C8 0FEC 23831 21482 5D17 53EA
336 10096 17354 2770 43CA 5048 8677 13B8 21E5 21380 14678 5384 3956
337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB 11694 27881 2DAE 6CE9 4282 30656 10BA 77C0
338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A 7771 7189 1E5B 1C15 32382 13721 7E7E 3599
339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D 32566 16562 7F36 40B2 806 21831 0326 5547
340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD 1342 32090 053E 7D5A 6238 30208 185E 7600
341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743 9509 17821 2525 459D 10488 9995 28F8 270B
342 25501 10346 639D 286A 24606 5173 601E 1435 19507 3248 4C33 0CB0
343 4489 13200 1189 3390 22804 6600 5914 19C8 27288 12030 6A98 2EFE
344 31011 30402 7923 76C2 27969 15201 6D41 3B61 2390 5688 0956 1638
345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F 14724 16507 3984 407B 19094 2082 4A96 0822
346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A 24682 1541 606A 0605 13860 23143 3624 5A67
347 11846 21398 2E46 5396 5923 10699 1723 29CB 9225 25906 2409 6532
348 30331 31104 767B 7980 27373 15552 6AED 3CC0 2505 15902 09C9 3E1E
349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0 5294 12136 14AE 2F68 27806 21084 6C9E 525C
350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3 16077 31429 3ECD 7AC5 2408 25723 0968 647B
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
E-10
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
351 29572 5578 7384 15CA 14786 2789 39C2 0AE5 13347 13427 3423 3473
352 13173 25731 3375 6483 18538 31869 486A 7C7D 7885 31084 1ECD 796C
353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6 17703 5331 4527 14D3 6669 24023 1A0D 5DD7
354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C 112 5542 0070 15A6 8187 23931 1FFB 5D7B
355 12083 31098 2F33 797A 17993 15549 4649 3CBD 18145 15836 46E1 3DDC
356 22822 16408 5926 4018 11411 8204 2C93 200C 14109 6085 371D 17C5
357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA 1467 3181 05BB 0C6D 14231 30324 3797 7674
358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F 13846 19315 3616 4B73 27606 27561 6BD6 6BA9
359 10205 14732 27DD 398C 16958 7366 423E 1CC6 783 13821 030F 35FD
360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8 23649 11372 5C61 2C6C 6301 269 189D 010D
361 22098 1476 5652 05C4 11049 738 2B29 02E2 5067 28663 13CB 6FF7
362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD 1320 24130 0528 5E42 15383 29619 3C17 73B3
363 4408 21118 1138 527E 2204 10559 089C 293F 1392 2043 0570 07FB
364 102 22198 0066 56B6 51 11099 0033 2B5B 7641 6962 1DD9 1B32
365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E 13816 11015 35F8 2B07 25700 29119 6464 71BF
366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B 9823 23041 265F 5A01 25259 22947 62AB 59A3
367 26967 25802 6957 64CA 25979 12901 657B 3265 19813 9612 4D65 258C
368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0 16004 1248 3E84 04E0 20933 18698 51C5 490A
369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38 24240 15644 5EB0 3D1C 638 16782 027E 418E
370 655 24248 028F 5EB8 20631 12124 5097 2F5C 16318 29735 3FBE 7427
371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7 12637 21959 315D 55C7 6878 2136 1ADE 0858
372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72 8105 11577 1FA9 2D39 1328 8086 0530 1F96
373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452 18279 6697 4767 1A29 14744 10553 3998 2939
374 8535 1806 2157 070E 16763 903 417B 0387 22800 11900 5910 2E7C
375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B 29822 28593 747E 6FB1 25919 19996 653F 4E1C
376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68 6055 5428 17A7 1534 4795 5641 12BB 1609
377 21538 25755 5422 649B 10769 31857 2A11 7C71 18683 28328 48FB 6EA8
378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A 17785 7837 4579 1E9D 32658 25617 7F92 6411
379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB 6516 17385 1974 43E9 1586 26986 0632 696A
380 14717 29096 397D 71A8 19822 14548 4D6E 38D4 27208 5597 6A48 15DD
381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE 5833 1519 16C9 05EF 17517 14078 446D 36FE
382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95 25528 20982 63B8 51F6 599 13247 0257 33BF
383 5008 25525 1390 63B5 2504 32742 09C8 7FE6 16253 499 3F7D 01F3
384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1 16209 27076 3F51 69C4 8685 30469 21ED 7705
385 22175 28855 569F 70B7 31391 30311 7A9F 7667 29972 17544 7514 4488
386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC 5871 16366 16EF 3FEE 22128 28510 5670 6F5E
387 22546 20373 5812 4F95 11273 27126 2C09 69F6 19871 23196 4D9F 5A9C
388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD 30722 23618 7802 5C42 19405 13384 4BCD 3448
389 133 26155 0085 662B 20882 32041 5192 7D29 17972 4239 4634 108F
390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D 22601 17322 5849 43AA 8599 20725 2197 50F5
391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6 4368 6107 1110 17DB 10142 6466 279E 1942
392 1397 21479 0575 53E7 21354 26575 536A 67CF 26834 28465 68D2 6F31
393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA 9012 15957 2334 3E55 23710 19981 5C9E 4E0D
394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37 7766 28967 1E56 7127 27280 16723 6A90 4153
395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C 13435 5638 347B 1606 6570 4522 19AA 11AA
396 5904 20626 1710 5092 2952 10313 0B88 2849 7400 678 1CE8 02A6
397 24341 423 5F15 01A7 32346 20207 7E5A 4EEF 26374 15320 6706 3BD8
398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77 18600 19207 48A8 4B07 22218 29116 56CA 71BC
399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1 11739 20580 2DDB 5064 29654 5388 73D6 150C
400 1862 10818 0746 2A42 931 5409 03A3 1521 13043 22845 32F3 593D
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
08/15/2000 E-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22 2925 11537 0B6D 2D11 24457 28430 5F89 6F0E
402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A 2776 10125 0AD8 278D 17161 8660 4309 21D4
403 12589 14629 312D 3925 18758 21166 4946 52AE 21314 2659 5342 0A63
404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7 11504 30407 2CF0 76C7 28728 8803 7038 2263
405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677 13818 21767 35FA 5507 22162 19690 5692 4CEA
406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40 8800 5536 2260 15A0 26259 22169 6693 5699
407 17000 29492 4268 7334 8500 14746 2134 399A 22180 8511 56A4 213F
408 21913 5719 5599 1657 31516 17687 7B1C 4517 2266 17393 08DA 43F1
409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3 15160 16485 3B38 4065 10291 11336 2833 2C48
410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C 14120 6078 3728 17BE 26620 13576 67FC 3508
411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417 3630 31799 0E2E 7C37 19650 22820 4CC2 5924
412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D 8953 30746 22F9 781A 14236 13344 379C 3420
413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6 2941 14435 0B7D 3863 11482 20107 2CDA 4E8B
414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6 11040 15739 2B20 3D7B 25289 8013 62C9 1F4D
415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72 17947 14265 461B 37B9 12011 18835 2EEB 4993
416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102 11541 12417 2D15 3081 13892 16793 3644 4199
417 17435 9075 441B 2373 29661 24453 73DD 5F85 17336 9818 43B8 265A
418 18527 32265 485F 7E09 30207 28984 75FF 7138 10759 4673 2A07 1241
419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67 15951 18447 3E4F 480F 26816 13609 68C0 3529
420 18783 17434 495F 441A 30079 8717 757F 220D 31065 10054 7959 2746
421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92 30413 6089 76CD 17C9 8578 10988 2182 2AEC
422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D 3991 31802 0F97 7C3A 24023 14744 5DD7 3998
423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC 31205 15846 79E5 3DE6 16199 17930 3F47 460A
424 10004 25384 2714 6328 5002 12692 138A 3194 22310 25452 5726 636C
425 13459 18908 3493 49DC 19353 9454 4B99 24EE 30402 11334 76C2 2C46
426 13383 25816 3447 64D8 19443 12908 4BF3 326C 16613 15451 40E5 3C5B
427 28930 4661 7102 1235 14465 18214 3881 4726 13084 11362 331C 2C62
428 4860 31115 12FC 798B 2430 29433 097E 72F9 3437 2993 0D6D 0BB1
429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B 6554 16697 199A 4139 1703 11012 06A7 2B04
430 24161 1311 5E61 051F 32480 19635 7EE0 4CB3 22659 5806 5883 16AE
431 20067 16471 4E63 4057 30433 28183 76E1 6E17 26896 20180 6910 4ED4
432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B 21733 20721 54E5 50F1 1735 8932 06C7 22E4
433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0 6686 8056 1A1E 1F78 16178 23878 3F32 5D46
434 28743 21062 7047 5246 27123 10531 69F3 2923 19166 20760 4ADE 5118
435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA 32260 14845 7E04 39FD 665 32764 0299 7FFC
436 249 10141 00F9 279D 20908 24050 51AC 5DF2 20227 32325 4F03 7E45
437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46 9980 9507 26FC 2523 24447 25993 5F7F 6589
438 29682 22141 73F2 567D 14841 25858 39F9 6502 16771 3268 4183 0CC4
439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C 28014 5926 6D6E 1726 27209 25180 6A49 625C
440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724 13574 13202 3506 3392 6050 12149 17A2 2F75
441 26706 30663 6852 77C7 13353 30175 3429 75DF 29088 10193 71A0 27D1
442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C 2574 16262 0A0E 3F86 7601 9128 1DB1 23A8
443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4 2108 14322 083C 37F2 4905 7843 1329 1EA3
444 5762 10228 1682 27F4 2881 5114 0B41 13FA 5915 25474 171B 6382
445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0 20906 11768 51AA 2DF8 6169 11356 1819 2C5C
446 21882 18045 557A 467D 10941 27906 2ABD 6D02 21303 11226 5337 2BDA
447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361 22153 32652 5689 7F8C 28096 16268 6DC0 3F8C
448 206 27066 00CE 69BA 103 13533 0067 34DD 8905 14491 22C9 389B
449 28798 13740 707E 35AC 14399 6870 383F 1AD6 26997 8366 6975 20AE
450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7 16201 21703 3F49 54C7 15047 26009 3AC7 6599
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
E-12
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
451 13463 3684 3497 0E64 19355 1842 4B9B 0732 17460 5164 4434 142C
452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3 20428 24685 4FCC 606D 17629 17126 44DD 42E6
453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2 31950 7657 7CCE 1DE9 10461 21566 28DD 543E
454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5 19686 29014 4CE6 7156 21618 21845 5472 5555
455 23429 9816 5B85 2658 31762 4908 7C12 132C 11498 28149 2CEA 6DF5
456 12990 4444 32BE 115C 6495 2222 195F 08AE 193 9400 00C1 24B8
457 12421 5664 3085 1620 18834 2832 4992 0B10 16140 19459 3F0C 4C03
458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE 27061 3679 69B5 0E5F 13419 7190 346B 1C16
459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80 22020 13632 5604 3540 10864 3101 2A70 0C1D
460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0 936 14064 03A8 36F0 28935 491 7107 01EB
461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8 19553 15084 4C61 3AEC 18765 25497 494D 6399
462 30109 29971 759D 7513 27422 29877 6B1E 74B5 27644 29807 6BFC 746F
463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51 32560 18580 7F30 4894 21564 26508 543C 678C
464 4862 16910 12FE 420E 2431 8455 097F 2107 5142 4442 1416 115A
465 14091 20739 370B 5103 19029 26301 4A55 66BD 1211 4871 04BB 1307
466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF 3351 24027 0D17 5DDB 1203 31141 04B3 79A5
467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213 21549 22325 542D 5735 5199 9864 144F 2688
468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F 26145 27539 6621 6B93 16945 12589 4231 312D
469 21379 10072 5383 2758 30737 5036 7811 13AC 4883 5417 1313 1529
470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57 10138 21399 279A 5397 25040 8549 61D0 2165
471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64 24748 13874 60AC 3632 7119 14288 1BCF 37D0
472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0 30625 360 77A1 0168 17826 8503 45A2 2137
473 10147 29799 27A3 7467 16897 29711 4201 740F 4931 20357 1343 4F85
474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8 28955 13820 711B 35FC 25705 15381 6469 3C15
475 17359 263 43CF 0107 28727 20159 7037 4EBF 10726 18065 29E6 4691
476 13248 24734 33C0 609E 6624 12367 19E0 304F 17363 24678 43D3 6066
477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7 11370 28239 2C6A 6E4F 2746 23858 0ABA 5D32
478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A 18499 10189 4843 27CD 10952 7610 2AC8 1DBA
479 10345 25116 2869 621C 17892 12558 45E4 310E 19313 18097 4B71 46B1
480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5 15171 26710 3B43 6856 29756 20918 743C 51B6
481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940 13933 7328 366D 1CA0 14297 7238 37D9 1C46
482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F 17275 31547 437B 7B3B 21290 30549 532A 7755
483 8808 28728 2268 7038 4404 14364 1134 381C 1909 16320 0775 3FC0
484 12744 25092 31C8 6204 6372 12546 18E4 3102 8994 20853 2322 5175
485 11618 22601 2D62 5849 5809 25112 16B1 6218 13295 26736 33EF 6870
486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7 13581 19183 350D 4AEF 21590 10327 5456 2857
487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD 29477 32594 7325 7F52 26468 24404 6764 5F54
488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE 27592 7679 6BC8 1DFF 13636 7931 3544 1EFB
489 31892 17739 7C94 454B 15946 27801 3E4A 6C99 5207 5310 1457 14BE
490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163 11982 22157 2ECE 568D 29493 554 7335 022A
491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA 11781 16365 2E05 3FED 18992 27311 4A30 6AAF
492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2 1482 9561 05CA 2559 12567 6865 3117 1AD1
493 18208 16870 4720 41E6 9104 8435 2390 20F3 12075 7762 2F2B 1E52
494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23 7514 23341 1D5A 5B2D 26658 15761 6822 3D91
495 21901 18400 558D 47E0 31510 9200 7B16 23F0 21077 12697 5255 3199
496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47 12283 27039 2FFB 699F 15595 24850 3CEB 6112
497 18994 1937 4A32 0791 9497 19956 2519 4DF4 4921 15259 1339 3B9B
498 13608 17963 3528 462B 6804 27945 1A94 6D29 14051 24243 36E3 5EB3
499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E 13746 3719 35B2 0E87 5956 30508 1744 772C
500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A 5853 6469 16DD 1945 21202 13982 52D2 369E
. . . continued on next page
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
08/15/2000 E-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)
501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48 19006 9636 4A3E 25A4 11239 25039 2BE7 61CF
502 23380 29989 5B54 7525 11690 29870 2DAA 74AE 30038 24086 7556 5E16
503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E 5669 4263 1625 10A7 30222 21581 760E 544D
504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB 21513 27985 5409 6D51 13476 21346 34A4 5362
505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF 11695 18539 2DAF 486B 2497 28187 09C1 6E1B
506 14473 28919 3889 70F7 19860 30279 4D94 7647 31842 23231 7C62 5ABF
507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C 3265 3646 0CC1 0E3E 24342 18743 5F16 4937
508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104 10226 10370 27F2 2882 25857 11594 6501 2D4A
509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A 6113 13997 17E1 36AD 27662 7198 6C0E 1C1E
510 1058 2224 0422 08B0 529 1112 0211 0458 24594 105 6012 0069
511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB 6013 17257 177D 4369 16790 4534 4196 11B6
E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
E-14
Notes
E
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Appendix Content
Test Equipment Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Test Equipment Connections F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Connection F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Cable Calibration F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter F-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Gigatronics 8542 power meter F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
F
Test Equipment Preparation
08/15/2000 F-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Purpose
This appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCS
interface, the HP8935 and the Advantest R3465. The Cybertest test set
doesn’t require any setup.
HP8921A Test Equipment
Connections
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A test
equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects
each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to
Table F-4). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and
any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses
have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to
the test equipment.
Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium Reference
From Test Set: To Interface:
Connector Type
8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS
C
onnector
T
ype
CW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–female – SMC–female
114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–female – SMC–female
IQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–female – SMC–female
DET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–female – SMC–female
CONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin custom BUS
10 MHZ OUT SYNTH REF IN BNC–male – BNC–male
HPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable
10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–male – BNC–male
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-2
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium Reference
REF IN
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
FW00368
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
08/15/2000 F-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Figure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium Reference
From Test Set: To Interface:
Connector Type
8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS
C
onnector
T
ype
CW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–female – SMC–female
114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–female – SMC–female
IQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–female – SMC–female
DET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–female – SMC–female
CONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin custom BUS
10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–male – BNC–male
HPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable
10 MHZ INPUT 10 MHZ OUT BNC–male – BNC–male
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-4
REF IN
REAR PANEL
COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET
TO POWER
METER GPIB
CONNECTOR
TO GPIB
INTERFACE
BOX
10 MHZ WITH
RUBIDIUM STANDARD
Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference
HP83203B CDMA
CELLULAR ADAPTER
HP8921A CELL
SITE TEST SET
HP83236A PCS
INTERFACE
HP–IB
FW00369
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
08/15/2000 F-5
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
HP8921A System Connectivity
Test
Follow the steps outlined in Table F-3 to verify that the connections
between the PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables are
intact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of each
instrument.
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system
controllers, from the system before running the
connectivity software.
IMPORTANT
*
Table F-3: System Connectivity
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select Card.
5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. In
the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through the
connectivity setup.
7Do the following when the test is complete,
Sposition cursor on STOP TEST and select it
SOR press the [K5] pushbutton.
8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
9Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-6
Setting HP8921A and
HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address
Step Action
1If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.
2Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.
SHP8921A HP–IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configure
on the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).
SHP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:
– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1
Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Before the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A
Step Action
1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
2Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.
3Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.
4Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
Pretest Setup for HP8935
Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935
Step Action
1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.
2Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.
3Press the Push to Select knob.
4Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.
5 Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
08/15/2000 F-7
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Advantest R3465 Connection
The following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest test
equipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment
is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects
each piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to
Table F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF and
any piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses
have been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to
the test equipment.
Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference
ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
GPIB
CONNECTOR
SERIAL I/O
LOCAL IN
SERIAL I/O
SYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUT
PARALLEL
EXT TRIGGER
10 MHZ REF
GATE IN
GPIB
CDMA CLOCK OUT
AC POWER
AC POWER
R3561L
REAR PANEL
R3465
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)
XYZ
IF OUT
421 MHZ
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FW00370
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-8
Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHz
Rubidium reference.
SERIAL I/O
GPIB
CONNECTOR ADVANTEST R3465
REAR PANEL
Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference
FROM 10 MHZ
RUBIDIUM REFERENCE
LOCAL IN
SERIAL I/O
IF OUT
SYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUT
PARALLEL
EXT TRIGGER
10 MHZ REF
GATE IN
GPIB
CDMA CLOCK OUT
AC POWER
AC POWER
R3465/3463
REAR PANEL
R3561L
REAR PANEL
TO T–CONNECTOR
ON FRONT PANEL
(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)
XYZ
421 MHZ
TO POWER METER
GPIB CONNECTOR
TO GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
FW00371
F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued
08/15/2000 F-9
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
R3465 GPIB Address & Clock
setup
Table F-7 describes the steps to set the GPIB address and clock for the
Advantest R3465 equipment.
Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup
Step Action
1Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:
SPush the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
SPush the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)
– Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.
–If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob to
enter)
2Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set if
required)
Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)
SPush the Date/Time CRT menu key
SIf required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernier
knob to enter)
S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).
Pretest Setup for Advantest
R3465
Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testing
it must be set up correctly for automatic testing.
Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346
Step Action
1Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.
2Press the RESET button.
F
Manual Cable Calibration
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-10
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using HP PCS Interface (HP83236)
Table F-9 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using
the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
This calibration method must be executed with great care.
Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit of
the power meter sensor (–30 dBm).
NOTE
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.
1Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.
2Press the Preset pushbutton.
3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.
7If using HP 83236A:
Set channel number=<chan#>:
– Position cursor at Channel
Number and select it.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric
keypad; press [Enter] and the
screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the
chan# will be displayed on the
channel number line.
If using HP 83236B:
Set channel frequency:
– Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.
– Select User Defined Frequency.
– Go Back to Previous Menu.
– Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and
enter actual RX frequency.
– Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and
enter actual TX frequency.
. . . continued on next page
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
08/15/2000 F-11
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step Action
8Set RF Generator level:
– Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.
– Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.
9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:
– Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10 Select Back to Previous Menu.
11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:
Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:
– Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
– Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
– Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 – 1910
MHz).
– Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.
12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.
16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude
by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter
before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each
component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record the
calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.
SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = –1.4 dB
(B) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB
(B) Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB
. . . continued on next page
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-12
Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step Action
19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test
setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
SExample: Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
21 Select Continue (K2).
22 Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.
23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields
not indicated remain at default):
SVerify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:
– under To Screen, select More
– select IO CONFIG
– Set HP–IB Adrs to 18
– set Mode to Talk&Lstn
SVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)
– Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.
– Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq
25 Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
08/15/2000 F-13
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
(A)
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
150 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
20 dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
FW00292
Figure F-5: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-14
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using Advantest R3465
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
NOTE
Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performed
at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display
2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key
4Select the Setup CRT menu key
5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
6Select the return CRT menu key
7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area
8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys
9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
15 Record the power meter reading ________________________
. . . continued on next page
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
08/15/2000 F-15
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step Action
16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-6, “Setups
A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.
Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable = –1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB
18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area
21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency
22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23 Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-16
POWER
SENSOR
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
(A)
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(C)
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
& (B)
FW00320
Figure F-6: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
08/15/2000 F-17
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Calibrating HP 437 Power
Meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps outlined in Table F-11 to enter information unique to
the power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-7 as
required.
This procedure must be done in conjunction with the
automated calibration to enter power sensor specific
calibration values.
IMPORTANT
*
CONNECT POWER
SENSOR WITH POWER
METER
TURNED OFF
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
TO POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.
POWER REFERENCE IS
ENABLED USING THE
SHIFT
'
KEYS
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
FW00308
Figure F-7: Power Meter Detail
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis–calibration.
1– Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.
– Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
2Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.
NOTE
The calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed to
warm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
3Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:
– To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET].
– Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].
– Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].
–To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].
. . . continued on next page
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-18
Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step Action
4Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:
– Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.
– Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [y] or [b] button to
select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].
NOTE
Be sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOT
displayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then ['] to turn it off.
5 Press [ZERO]. Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.
6Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.
7To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:
– Press [SHIFT] then ['].
– Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.
8Perform the following to set the REF CF %:
– Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.
– Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)
NOTE
If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.
9Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:
– Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.
–CF%Enter
the sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and
0.10 is normal.)
10 To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:
– Press [SHIFT] then ['].
– Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output.
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
08/15/2000 F-19
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Calibrating Gigatronics 8542
power meter
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps in Table F-12 to enter information unique to the power
sensor.
Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter
Step Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
NOTE
Allow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before
performing the calibration procedure.
1SMake sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.
SConnect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
SSet the POWER pushbutton to ON.
2Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:
SPress MENU. Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.
SUse the b arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.
SUse the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C or 8542C (as appropriate).
SPress ' and use the by arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.
SPress ENTER.
3SConnect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.
SPress ZERO.
SWait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during this
process.
SDisconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.
F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
F-20
Figure F-8: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
WITH POWER METER
TURNED OFF
CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO
CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT
FRONT View REAR View
GPIB CONNECTIONAC POWER
FW00564
F
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Appendix G: Download ROM Code
Appendix Content
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Procedure – Downloading Device ROM Code F-1. . . . . . . . . .
F
Table of Contents – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
Notes
F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF
08/15/2000 G-1
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Exception Procedure –
Downloading Device ROM
Code
This procedure is not part of a normal optimization.
Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternative
exists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.
An MGLI or GLI must be INS (green) before ROM code
can be downloaded to non–GLI devices.
NOTE
Release 2.9.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a
device loaded with Release 2.8.x ROM code, and Release
2.8.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a device
loaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code.
All devices in a BTS must have the same Release–level
ROM and RAM code before the optimization and ATP
procedures can be performed.
If a newly–installed Release 8–equipped BTS is to be
upgraded to Release 2.9.x, the optimization and
Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) should be accomplished
with the Release 2.8.x code and software. Following the
optimization, the site code and software should be
upgraded to Release 2.9.x by the CBSC. It is not necessary
to perform the optimization and ATPs again after the
upgrade.
If a replacement device with Release 2.8.x ROM code must
be used in a Release 2.9.x–equipped BTS, the device ROM
code can be changed using the CDMA LMF before the
performing the BTS optimization and ATPs. A device
loaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code can not be converted
back to Release 2.8.x ROM code in the field without
Motorola assistance.
WARNING
If it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the CDMA
LMF, the procedure in Table G-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM
code download using the CDMA LMF.
Prerequisites
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAM
code files exist on the CDMA LMF for each of the devices to be loaded.
F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
G-2
The Release level of the ROM code to be downloaded
must be the same as the Release level of the ROM code
resident in the other devices in the BTS. Release 2.9.x
ROM code must not be downloaded to a frame having
Release 2.8.x code, and Release 2.8.x code must not be
downloaded to a frame having Release 2.9.x code.
This procedure should only be used to upgrade
replacement devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used to
upgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded
from Release 2.8.x to Release 2.9.x, optimization and ATP
must first be performed with the BTS in a Release 2.8.x
configuration. Following this, the upgrade from Release
2.8.x to Release 2.9.x should be done by the CBSC.
CAUTION
Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices
Step Action
1Click on the device to be loaded.
2From the Device pull down menu, select Status.
A status report window will appear
3Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
NOTE
“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This number is used as the last four digits
in the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file
can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.
4 Click OK to close the status window.
5Click on the device to be loaded.
* IMPORTANT
The CDMA LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files must
be selected manually.
6From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code Manual.
A file selection window will appear.
7Double–click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file.
8Double–click the Code folder.
A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.
. . . continued on next page
F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued
08/15/2000 G-3
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARY
Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices
Step Action
! CAUTION
A ROM code file with the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) must be chosen. Using a file
with the wrong HW Bin Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.
9Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Type
number noted in step 3 (e.g., file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with a HW Bin
Type of 0604).
The file should be highlighted.
10 Click on the Load button.
A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.
11 Click OK to close the status window.
12 From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.
13 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download and click Save.
A pop–up message will appear showing the CDF file has been updated.
14 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.
15 Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.
NOTE
RAM code is automatically selected for download.
16 From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code to download RAM code.
A status report is displayed showing the result of the download.
17 Click OK to close the status window.
18 Observe the downloaded device to ensure it is OOS–RAM (yellow) for non–GLI devices or INS
(green) for GLIs.
19 Click on the device which was loaded with code.
20 From the Device pull down menu, select Status.
Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window.
21 Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the data
download portion of the Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices procedure, Table 3-14,
to download data to other device types after their ROM code has been upgraded and RAM code
downloaded.
F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000
G-4
Notes
F
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARYIndex-1
Index
Numbers
10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional test equipment,
1-11
10BaseT/10Base2 converter
LMF to BTS connection, 3-20
remove from BTS, 5-4
2–way splitter, optional test equipment, 1-10
A
Abbreviated
RX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4
TX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4
Acceptance Test Procedure. See ATP
ACTIVE LED
GLI, 6-25
MCC, 6-27
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,
3-6
ALARM LED, GLI, 6-25
Alarm Monitor window, 3-85
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-85
All RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-6
All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,
RFDS, 6-21
All TX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5
All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5
AMR, 1-18
Ancillary frame, when to optimize, B-1
Applying AC Power, 2-9
ATP
all inclusive TX acceptance test outline, 4-4
automated introduction, 4-1
code domain noise floor acceptance test procedure,
4-16
code domain power acceptance test procedure, 4-16
failure report generation, 4-20
FER test, frame error rate testing, 4-19
pilot time offset, 4-13
prerequisites, 4-2
spectral purity TX mask, 4-10
test matrix/detailed optimization, B-2
waveform quality (Rho), 4-12
waveform quality (RHO) acceptance test procedure,
4-12
Attenuator, required test equipment, 1-9
B
Basic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-1
Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-11
Battery Discharge Test, 2-12
Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-7
BBX
carrier spectral purity, 4-9
gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-1
primary and redundant, TX tests to be performed,
4-7
BBX2, 1-18
BBX2 Connector, 6-15
BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-27
BDC, pilot gain setting, 4-18
Bringing modules into service, prepare to leave the
site, 5-3
Broad Band Receiver. See BBX
BTS
download, 3-30
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-28
LMF connection, 3-9, 3-20
log out of session, 5-4
Index – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-2
RX sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8
system software download, 3-3
when to optimize, B-1
BTS Frame Erasure Rate. See FER
BTS Log In Procedure, GUI, 3-22
BTS login
CLI environment, 3-24
General, 3-21
GUI environment, 3-22
BTS Logout
CLI environment, 3-26
GUI environment, 3-25
BTS Site Setup for Acceptance Test Procedures, 3-74
Create CAL File, 3-75
bts–nnn.cal File, 3-16
C
Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,
F-2, F-4
Calibrate BLO, 3-64
Calibrating Cables, 3-58
Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS Interface
HP83236B, F-10
Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-58
Calibration
data file calibration, BLO, 3-66
power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-19
Calibration Audit failure, 6-8
calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-66
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-3
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5
Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2
Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-10
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-10
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-9
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-9
cbsc folder, 3-17
CCD, 1-18
CDF
site configuration, 3-2
site equipage verification, 3-3
site type and equipage data information, 2-1
CDMA
allocation diagram for the North American, cellular
telephone frequency spectrum, D-4
optimization/ATP test matrix, B-1
subscriber mobile radiotelephone, optional test
equipment, 1-10
cdma Folder, 3-15
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-1
types configuration, 3-2
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
Channel Service Unit, 3-4
CIO, 1-18
CIO Connectors, 6-15
Clock Sync Module. See CSM
Code domain power/noise floor
acceptance test, 4-15
analyzer display, 4-17
code Folder, 3-17
Communication test set, rear panel, F-2, F-4
Communications test set. See Test equipment
Connect BTS T1 spans, 5-5
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-47
Connector Functionality
Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-14
Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-14
Control, TX output verification, 4-3
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-11
Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,
5-1
Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-1
CSM, 1-18
and LFR primary functions, 3-37
CSM frequency verification, 3-39
CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-23
Customer I/O, 1-20
Index – continued
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARYIndex-3
D
data Folder, 3-18
DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame), 2-7
DC Power Problems, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-18
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-22
Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2
Devices, download. See Download
Digital Control Problems, 6-16
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-16
Digital multimeter, required test equipment, 1-9
Directional coupler, required test equipment, 1-9
Documents, required, 1-12
Download
See also Devices
BTS, 3-30
BTS system software, 3-3
Download BLO Procedure, 3-70
Download from the CBSC, prepare to leave the site,
5-3
download ROM and RAM code, G-2
Download/Enable MCCs, 3-35
Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-32
Duplexer, optional test equipment, 1-10
Duplexer/Directional Coupler DDC, 1-18, 1-20, 1-21
E
E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4
Enable CSMs & BDCs, 3-34
End LMF session, 5-4
Equipment Overview, 1-14
Equipment warm-up, 3-49
establish MMI communication, 3-26
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-28
transceiver, 1-7
Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-20
F
Failure report generation, 4-20
FER, acceptance test, 4-19
Files
calibration data file, BLO, 3-66
intermediate file, 4-20
Filtronics, low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or
equivalent, optional test equipment, 1-10
Fluke, model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit, test
equipment, 1-9
Folder Structure Overview, 3-15
Frame, equipage preliminary operations, 2-1
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-24
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10
G
Gain set point, C-1
Generating an ATP Report, 4-20
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4
Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-20
GLI Connector, 6-14
GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-15
GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-25
GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-26
GLI2, 1-18
GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators, 6-26
GPIB, F-1, F-5, F-7
cables, 1-8
GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5
GPS Initialization/Verification
estimated position accuracy, 3-40
surveyed position accuracy, 3-40
GPS satellite system, 3-35
Group Line Interface. See GLI
H
Hardware Requirements, 1-6
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional
test equipment, 1-11
High–impedance conductive wrist strap, required test
equipment, 1-9
Index – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-4
HP 83236A, F-5
HP 8921A/600 test set, 1-8
HP8921A, F-5
HSO, 1-18
HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-37
Huber & Suhner, required test equipment, 1-9
HyperTerminal, Creating named HyperTerminal
connection, 3-13
HyperTerminal , create named connection, 3-13
I
I and Q values, E-1
Initial HP8921A setup, F-10
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-1
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3
Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, B-2
Intermediate file, generate ATP file using, 4-20
Internal FRUs, 1-17
IS–97 specification, E-1
ISB Inter Shelf Bus connectors, 6-14
L
LAN
BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-28
optional test equipment, 1-10
LED Status Combinations for all Modules except
GLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-22
LFR, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6
LMF, F-1, F-7
BTS connection, 3-20
logout procedure, 5-4
platform requirements, 1-6
remove from BTS, 5-4
shut down UNIX, 5-4
terminal, 1-6
to BTS connection, 3-4, 3-9
TX acceptance tests, 4-3
view CDF information, 3-3
lmf Folder, 3-15
Load Center Wiring, 2-5
loads folder, 3-17
Local Maintenance Facility. See LMF
Log out
of BTS, 5-4
of LMF PC, 5-4
Logging Into a BTS, 3-21
Logging Out, 3-24
LORAN–C Initialization/Verification, 3-45
LPA errors, 6-6
LPA Module LED, 6-28
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-28
M
Master Group Line Interface. See MGLI
MASTER LED, GLI, 6-25
MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-27
MMI common connections, 3-27
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-24
GLI, 6-26
MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-27
MMI equipment setup, 3-27
Module status indicators, 6-22
MPC, 1-18
Multi Channel Card. See MCC
Multi–FER test Failure, 6-11
N
New installations, 1-4
No AMR control, 6-17
No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-17
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-18
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-19
No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-16
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-16
No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-17
No or missing span line traffic, 6-17
North American, cellular telephone system frequency
spectrum, CDMA allocation, D-4
Index – continued
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARYIndex-5
O
Online Help, 3-27
Optional test equipment, 1-10
10 MHz rubidium standard, 1-11
2–way splitter, 1-10
CDMA subscriber mobile or portable
radiotelephone, 1-10
duplexer, 1-10
frequency counter, 1-10
LAN tester, 1-10
oscilloscope, 1-10
RF circular, 1-11
RF test cable, 1-10
spectrum analyzer, 1-10
Oscilloscope, optional test equipment, 1-10
P
PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter
LMF to BTS connection, 3-20
remove from BTS, 5-4
Periodic optimization, 1-4
Pilot Time Offset. See PN
Pilot time offset, acceptance test, 4-13
Ping, 3-28
PN
offset programming information, E-1
offset usage, E-1
PN offset per sector, E-1
PN Offset Usage , E-1
Power Input, 6-14
Power Meter
illustration, F-17
Pre–calibration, F-17
Power meter
calibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-19
illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-20
required test equipment, 1-8
TX acceptance tests, 4-3
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-14
Pre–calibration, Power Meter, F-17
Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-1
test data sheets, A-2
Prepare to leave site
connect BTS T1 spans, 5-5
remove external test equipment, 5-3
Prepare to leave the site
bringing modules into service, 5-3
download code and data from CBSC, 5-3
Prerequisites, automated acceptance tests, 4-2
Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the
CBSC, 5-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4
Procedures to Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-1
Program, TSU NAM, 3-84
Pseudorandom Noise. See PN
Punch Block, 3-6
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-27
PWR/ALM LED
BBX2, 6-27
CSM, 6-23
DC/DC Converter, 6-22
generic, 6-22
MCC, 6-27
R
RAM code, described, 3-30
Report generation, ATP report, 4-20
Required test equipment
communications system analyzer, 1-6, 1-8
digital multimeter, 1-9
directional coupler, 1-9
Ethernet LAN transceiver, 1-7
GPIB cables, 1-8
high–impedance conductive wrist strap, 1-9
power meter, 1-8
RF adapters, 1-9
RF attenuator, 1-9
RF load, 1-9
RS232 to GPIB interface, 1-7
timing reference cables, 1-9
Required test equipment and software, list, 1-6
RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-26
RF
attenuator, 1-9
Circular – optional test equipment, 1-11
load for required test equipment, 1-9
required test equipment load, 1-9
Index – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-6
test cable, 1-9
RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-64
RFDS – Fault Isolation, 6-20
RFDS Calibration, 3-82
RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-21
RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-31
RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-82
Rho
TX waveform quality acceptance test, 4-12
waveform quality requirements, 4-12
ROM code
described, 3-30
downloading, G-1
ROM code download Caution, 3-32, G-2
ROM code download Warning, G-1
RS232 to GPIB interface
modifications required for Automated Testing, 1-7
required test equipment, 1-7
RX
acceptance tests, FER, 4-18
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-11
sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8
RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-20
S
SC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, B-4
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-15
SCCP shelf, 1-18
SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-7
Selecting Test Equipment, 3-56
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-80
Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-81
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-62
Setting Control Port, 3-5
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-63
SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, C-1
Site, equipage verification, 3-3
Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-2
Site documents, 1-12
site equippage, CDF file, 3-2
Site expansion, 1-4
Span line
T1/E1 verification equipment, 1-10
troubleshooting, 6-29
Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-30
Span Line connector , 6-14
SPANS LED, 6-25
Spectral purity, TX mask – primary and redundant
BBX, 4-7
Spectral purity transmit mask, acceptance test, 4-10
Spectrum analyzer, optional test equipment, 1-10
STATUS LED, GLI, 6-25
Supported Test Sets, 3-47
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-24
System Connectivity Test, F-5
T
T1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4
Tektronics model 2445 test equipment, 1-10
Telco Interface Board TIB, 1-20
Test data sheets
Alarm verification, A-11
general optimization checklist, A-4
GPS receiver operation, A-5
initial power tests, A-3
LFR receiver operation, A-6
pre–power tests, A-3
preliminary operations, A-2
RX antenna VSWR, A-11
SCLPA convergence, A-7
site checklist, A-2
TX antenna VSWR, A-10
TX BLO, A-8
verification of test equipment used, A-1
Test equipment
See also Optional test equipment; Required test
equipment
set up, TX output verification/control, 4-3
system analyzer, 1-8
TX acceptance tests, 4-3
verification data sheets, A-1
Test equipment connections , F-1
Index – continued
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP
PRELIMINARYIndex-7
Test Equipment Setup, 3-47
Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay Level
Offset, 3-61, F-14
Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-48
Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-68
Test Set Calibration, 3-55
Timing reference cables, required test equipment
Model SGLN1145A/4132A CSMs, 1-9
Model SGLN4132B CSMs, 1-9
Transmit TX path audit, 3-72
Transmit TX path calibration, 3-68
Transmit/Receive Module TRX, 1-20
Troubleshooting
DC Power Problems, 6-18
Set span configuration, 6-30
span problems, 6-29
TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-19
Troubleshooting CSM Checklist, 6-12
TX
acceptance tests
code domain power/noise floor, 4-15
equipment setup, 4-3
pilot time offset, 4-13
spectral purity mask, 4-9
spectrum analyzer display, 4-11
waveform quality (rho), 4-12
all inclusive TX ATP test, 4-4
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-10, A-11
BLO test data sheets, A-8
output acceptance tests
code domain power noise, 4-7
pilot time offset, 4-7
waveform quality, 4-7
TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-64
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , D-2
TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-19
TX Audit Test, 3-73
TX Bay Level Offset and TX ATP test equipment
setup calibration, 3-60
tx fine adjust, E-1
TX Path Calibration, 3-65
TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-2
U
UNIX, shut down on LMF, 5-4
Unshielded Twisted Pair. See UTP
Updating CDMA LMF Files, 5-1
UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-20
V
Verify
test equipment used, test data sheets, A-1
TX output, 4-3
version Folder, 3-17
Virtual BTS, 1-14
W
Waveform quality (Rho), acceptance test procedure,
4-12
When to optimize
Ancillary – table, B-1
BTS, B-1
inter–frame cabling, B-2
X
XCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-14
Xircom Model PE3–10B2
LMF to BTS connection, 3-20
remove from BTS, 5-4
Index – continued
PRELIMINARY
SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-8
Notes